JP6298921B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

A gaming machine capable of smoothly playing a game is provided. In a storage means capable of reading and writing data, at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored and a second storage area which is an unused area are necessary for progressing the game. A third storage area for saving various data, and setting the second storage area to an address position between the first storage area and the third storage area, Even if the number of data saved in the storage area exceeds the upper limit value in the design, the data of the set value is difficult to be overwritten. [Selection] Figure 64

Description

  The invention described in this specification (hereinafter referred to as “the present invention”) relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine or a pachinko machine (including a casino machine in which a reel is not stopped).

  A slot machine, which is a typical gaming machine, generally has control related to the progress of a game using a reel (for example, reel drive control, role determination (role lottery) control, and receiving / dispensing game media such as game medals). The main control board (main control means) that performs control of the game state, control of game state transition between multiple game states with different probability of determining the role, etc., and for the purpose of improving the interest of the game according to the game situation And a sub-control board (sub-control means) for controlling various effects (image effects by the image display device, sound effects by the speaker device, etc.), and information transmission between the two substrates is controlled from the main control board. It is possible to perform only one direction to the substrate.

  In addition, in a slot machine, generally, an effective line is set by inserting a specified number of game media, and a reel rotation start operation such as tilting a start lever is performed by a player, whereby a role determination process is started. Any game combination (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “combination”) or lose is determined, and then a plurality of reels start rotating. When a predetermined rotation speed is reached after a plurality of reels start rotating, a reel rotation stop operation such as pressing a stop switch is validated, and the player performs the reel rotation stop operation for each reel, so that each reel Are designed to stop rotating sequentially.

  Usually, the rotation stop of the plurality of reels is controlled based on the timing of the reel rotation stop operation by the player and the determined combination. That is, each reel is controlled to be able to stop at an arbitrary timing within a predetermined time (usually a time during which a maximum of 5 symbols can move) from the timing at which the reel rotation stop operation is performed. The winning combination determined by the determination process (hereinafter referred to as “approved winning combination” as appropriate) is established as much as possible (the combination of symbols constituting the combination (corresponding symbols) is stopped and displayed on the active line) A combination that has not been determined by the combination determination process (not won) is not established (the corresponding symbol is not stopped and displayed on the active line).

  In addition, in a slot machine, generally, a re-game player (a game medium cannot be acquired even if established, but the next game can be played without the player newly inserting a game medium) or a small role ( In addition to the normal combination called a combination (winning combination) that can acquire a predetermined number of game media when established, special game conditions (for example, the probability of determining a predetermined small combination (winning probability) is normal A special combination called “bonus combination” is provided. Usually, only a small number of symbols in the combination of symbols that define such special combinations are arranged on each reel.

  For this reason, even when a special combination is determined (winned), the player performs a reel rotation stop operation for each reel in anticipation of a timing at which the corresponding symbol can be stopped and displayed while discriminating the symbol to be rotated and displayed. If it is not possible to perform such an operation (hereinafter referred to as “pressing”), it is difficult to establish a special combination. However, if a special role has been decided but it could not be established, information indicating that the special role has been decided will be carried over to the next game (hereinafter, The opportunity to establish the determined special role is secured even for the player who is not good at holding the special role.

  In addition, in a conventional slot machine, a plurality of RT states (game states) having different determination probabilities (winning probabilities) of replaying roles (replaying roles) are provided, and predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, predetermined symbols) It is generally known that a transition is made to another RT state when the combination is stopped and displayed. Such transition between RT states is controlled by the main control board because it involves a change in the determination probability of a combination (re-playing combination). In addition, the period during which the re-game player decision probability is controlled to the RT state that is set to the highest is sometimes referred to as a replay time.

  On the other hand, a game period (game state) called AT (assist time) for notifying information that allows the player to play a game advantageously is set, and a predetermined notification effect (assist effect) is provided within this game period. There are also things to do. Such an AT may be set during a period (replay time) in which the re-gamer's decision probability is set to the highest RT state, and the AT during such a replay time is generally It is called ART (Assist Replay Time). As an assist effect performed during the AT, for example, when a small role that can acquire a game medium is determined (winned), this is notified, or the determined small role is established (correspondence Stop switch operation mode (operation sequence (hereinafter referred to as “push order”) indicating the order in which the plurality of stop switches should be operated, which is required for displaying symbols on the active line) In addition, there are known ones that notify the operation position (hereinafter referred to as “pressing position”) indicating the rotation position of the reel when the reel is to be operated.

  Until now, a slot machine (also referred to as “sub-AT machine”) that performs the above-described AT-related control processing (also referred to as “AT-related control processing”) exclusively by the sub-control means has been generally used. Recently, there was a problem that it was possible to forcibly set AT by performing fraudulent acts (goat acts), so recently, it is AT related with main control means that are harder to perform fraud than sub-control means. A slot machine (also referred to as “main AT machine”) that performs part of the control process is also known. For example, the main control means performs processing related to the setting of the AT and the processing for determining the push order notified during the AT, and the sub-control means is mainly determined by the main control means during the AT set by the main control means. There is known a main AT machine that performs a process of performing notification of the pushing order (assist effect). In such a main AT machine, various information related to the AT is managed by the main control means, and these pieces of information are appropriately transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means.

  In addition, when a special role is established or when an AT is set, a signal indicating this is sent to an external device such as a history display device or a management computer (hall computer) installed in a game shop (hall). (Hereinafter, such an output signal is referred to as an “outer end signal” as appropriate), and based on the outer end signal, the history of the number of special roles established and the number of AT settings is grasped and displayed to the player. It is also widely used to manage the ratio of the number of game media that has been paid out to the number of game media that have been thrown in.

  In addition, there is known a conventional slot machine that sets a state in which execution of a predetermined control process related to the progress of a game is delayed for a certain time (hereinafter referred to as “freeze” as appropriate). This freeze is set on the main control board to indicate that an advantageous state has occurred for the player, thereby increasing the player's expectation that the advantageous state has occurred. It is often used for the purpose of enhancing interest. In addition, when such a freeze is set, an effect that drives the reel in a special manner (hereinafter referred to as “freeze effect during freeze”) is executed, or the reel is played as in a normal game in a slot machine. It is also common to execute a game effect (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo game effect” where appropriate) performed by driving.

  Further, the conventional slot machine outputs (transmits) signals for transmitting various information (hereinafter referred to as “test signals”) to a predetermined test apparatus for inspecting whether or not it complies with legal standards. ) Is configured to. The slot machine to be tested is configured to a specification (hereinafter referred to as “test specification”) including a test circuit for electrical connection with a test apparatus. On the other hand, slot machines with specifications (hereinafter referred to as “mass production specifications”) sold to amusement stores and the like do not have a test circuit but have the same control program as the test specifications. A process for outputting a test signal at a predetermined timing is performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1 below).

JP 2013-230238 A

  As described above, in the conventional gaming machine, various ideas have been made to enhance the gameability and perform a smooth game, but there is room for further improvement.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly playing a game.

  The following gaming machines according to the present invention have the following features. In the following description of the characteristic configuration, an example of a configuration corresponding to an embodiment described later is shown in parentheses.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reel, and an event in which power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted Is generated, and when the power-off is detected thereafter, the power-off processing is configured to be executed, and the reel control means is a player in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. In a game that is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on the fact that a stop operation is received, is in a predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a player The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that has been stopped when a stop operation other than the final stop operation is received, and the player's final stop After the predetermined symbol combination stopped operation at a predetermined timing is accepted as an operation is stopped, the predetermined pattern is configured to impart a combination of game value corresponding to the player, the a predetermined gaming state, In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, and the predetermined timing is set as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even after the stop operation has been accepted, even if the predetermined symbol combination to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation has occurred and all the reels have subsequently stopped, the predetermined symbol combination has not been stopped. , the predetermined symbol combination is arranged to impart to the player a game value corresponding, wherein a predetermined game state and before In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, and stopped at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. In a situation where an operation is accepted and an event occurs in which the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted thereafter, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped until the power interruption is detected. It is characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, it is possible to smoothly advance the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the said slot machine schematically. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning of the reel of the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the kind-1 of the game combination in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the type-2 of game combination in the said slot machine. It is a figure showing type-3 of the game combination in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows (A) type-4 of a game combination and (B) specific symbol in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the combination determination result number selection probability (re-playing combination / winning combination-1) in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the combination determination result number selection probability (re-game combination / winning combination-2) in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the combination decision result number selection probability (re-game combination / winning combination-3) in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows (A) combination determination result number selection probability (re-playing combination / winning combination-4) and (B) combination determination result number selection probability (special combination) in the slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows notionally the function of the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship of each RT state in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship of each game mode in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of (A) AT lottery performed by the main control means of the said slot machine, (B) AT precursor G number lottery, and (C) pushing order game lottery. It is a figure which shows the press order instruction number-corresponding press order-display content correspondence table | surface in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the hand determination result number-push order instruction number correspondence table | surface in the said slot machine. (A) display mode of push order instruction number A2 by the WIN lamp in the slot machine, (B) display mode of push order instruction number A2 by the liquid crystal display device, (C) display mode of push order instruction number A8 by the WIN lamp, (D) Display mode of push order instruction number A8 by liquid crystal display device, (E) Display mode of push order instruction number A10 by liquid crystal display device, (F) Mode of displaying push order instruction number in binary number by WIN lamp, FIG. 5G is a diagram showing a change mode of a push order instruction display by the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation group number-combination determination result number correspondence table in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the list of the role determination result numbers for the mask process in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the list of the push order instruction | indication number which can be determined by the sub side in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the pushing order alerting | reporting timing in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows (A) push order alerting | reporting start timing in the said slot machine, (B) push order alerting | reporting start timing (change example), (C) push order alerting | reporting start timing (another change example). It is a figure which shows the difference in the circuit structure of the test specification and mass production specification in the control board of the said slot machine. It is a figure of (A) modification example M1, (B) modification example M2, (C) modification example M3 which shows the difference in the circuit structure of the test specification and mass production specification in the control board of the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of the storage area in the said slot machine. (A) Operation state flag storage area, (B) Operation symbol display flag storage area, (C) Winning / RP combination determination result number storage area, (D) Role combination determination result number storage area, (E) It is a figure which shows a pushing order instruction number storage area and (F) winning information output period timer storage area. (A) Test output port PO7 (when winning / RP winning information is output), (B) Test output port PO7 (when winning item winning information is output), (C) Test output port PO8 (operating state) It is a figure which shows (at the time of information output). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing (A) a winning / RP winning information storage area and (B) a bonus winning information storage area in the slot machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing (A) stop acceptance designation table T1 and (B) stop acceptance designation table T2 in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the (A) winning information output timing in the said slot machine, (B) re-game operation state flag set timing, (C) BB * RB operation state flag set timing. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) test specification determination preparatory process in the said slot machine, (B) test specification determination preparatory process (change example J1), and (C) test specification determination preparatory process (change example J2). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game progress control processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game start process in the said slot machine. Each flow of (A) game mode 0 (lever) processing, (B) game mode 1 (lever) processing, (C) game mode 2 (lever) processing, and (D) push order instruction number setting processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart to show. (A) gaming mode 3 (lever) processing, (B) gaming mode 4 (lever) processing, (C) gaming mode 5 (lever) processing, (D) gaming mode 6 (lever) processing, (E) ) It is a flowchart showing each flow of game mode 7 (lever) processing. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) symbol stop test signal output processing in the slot machine, and (B) symbol stop test signal output. (A) Reel rotation start preparation process (B) Reel rotation start preparation process (modified example K1), (C) Reel rotation start preparation process (modified example K2), (D) Reel rotation start preparation process ( It is a flowchart which shows each flow of the example of a change K3). (A) Reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K4), (B) Reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K5), (C) Reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K6) in the slot machine. It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game end check process in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) BB operation management processing, (B) RB operation management processing, (C) waiting time waiting processing, and (D) interruption waiting processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of RT transition processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) game mode 0 (all stop) process, (B) game mode 1 (all stop) process, and (C) game mode 2 (all stop) process in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) game mode 3 (all stop) process, (B) game mode 4 (all stop) process, and (C) game mode 5 (all stop) process in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) game mode 6 (all stop) process and (B) game mode 7 (all stop) process in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of the example of a partial change of the (A) timer interruption process in the said slot machine, and the (B) timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a test signal etc. output process in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of test signal output processing (modification example L1) in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of test signal etc. output processing (modification example L2) in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) program start process, (B) sub main loop process, and (C) power-off process in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) 1 command process in the said slot machine, and the process at the time of (B) start lever. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of the process at the time of the (A) process at the time of the 1st cylinder stop reception in the slot machine, (B) the process at the time of the 2nd cylinder stop reception, and (C) the process at the time of the 3rd cylinder stop reception. . FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating a part of the circuit configuration of (A) the test specification and (B) part of the circuit configuration of the mass production specification in the control board of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In the slot machine according to the second embodiment, (A) a part of the process performed at the start of the game, (B) a part of the process performed at the timer interruption, and (C) a part of the process performed at the time of accepting the start lever operation are shown. It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a test signal etc. output process in the slot machine which concerns on the said 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows (A) lighting timing pattern 1 and (B) lighting timing pattern 2 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows (A) lighting timing pattern 3 and (B) lighting timing pattern 4 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on the said 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows (A) lighting timing pattern 5 and (B) lighting timing pattern 6 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on the said 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows (A) lighting timing pattern 7 and (B) lighting timing pattern 8 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on the said 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows (A) lighting timing pattern 9 and (B) lighting timing pattern 10 of the display lamp in the slot machine which concerns on the said 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning of the electronic component of the main control board in the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the height of the electronic component arrange | positioned on the main control board in the slot machine which concerns on the said 4th Embodiment. (A) RAM area of pattern 1, (B) RAM area of pattern 2, (C) RAM area of pattern 3, and (D) pattern 4 in a gaming machine (slot machine) according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows a RAM area, (E) RAM area of the pattern 5, and (F) RAM area which continues to ROM area. It is a figure which shows the address map of RAM in the gaming machine (slot machine) according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the reel control in the slot machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. The reel control in the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment, (A) a flowchart showing a processing procedure when a rotation failure of the reel occurs during the rotation speed constant state, and (B) rotation of the reel during the rotation acceleration state. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence when a defect generate | occur | produces, (C) It is a flowchart which shows a process procedure when the rotation failure of a reel generate | occur | produces and a power failure generate | occur | produced in the rotation acceleration state. In the reel control in the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment, (A) a flowchart showing a processing procedure when all the spinning cylinders stop normally after winning the winning combination, (B) after accepting the third stop operation It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence when a power failure generate | occur | produces, (C) A flowchart which shows the process sequence when a rotation failure of a rotating cylinder generate | occur | produces after 3rd stop operation reception. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the number-of-wins of a re-game player, and a payout rate in the slot machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the (A) payout rate simulation result in the slot machine which concerns on the said 7th Embodiment, (B) winning probability and the number of payout of a winning combination. In the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment, (A) setting contents of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and (B) setting contents of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. FIG. (A) Setting contents of BB2 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21 in the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment, (B) Setting contents of BB2 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. (C) It is a figure which shows the setting content of MB1. FIG. 10 is an overview of a slot machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the alerting image in said other embodiment. (A) in said other embodiment is a figure which shows the alert image at the time of displaying on a small image display apparatus, (b) is a figure which shows the alert image at the time of displaying on a large sized image display apparatus. (A) in said other embodiment is a figure which shows the image display timing when a game medal is provided, (b) is a figure which shows the image display timing when a game medal is not provided. (A) in said other embodiment is a figure which shows the display image at the time of winning a cherry role in a normal game, (b) is a figure which shows the display image at the time of winning a push order bell role in AT preparation game. (A) in said other embodiment is a timing chart in the specification which cannot operate a several stop switch simultaneously, (b) is a timing chart in the specification which can operate a several stop switch simultaneously. It is a timing chart which shows each operation timing within the minimum game time in the other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the display timing of the attention calling image in the other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows another example of the display timing of the alert image in the other embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed in order of (a), (b), (c) in said other embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the image displayed in order of (a), (b), (c) in said other embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the display position of the alerting image in said other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of the image displayed in the order of (a), (b), (c) in said other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a warning image display timing at the time of the occurrence of an error in the other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows another example of the alerting image display timing at the time of the occurrence of an error in the other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the alerting image display timing at the time of the electric power supply stop in said other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the alert image display timing at the time of the presentation switch operation in said other embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, “combination determination processing” refers to a combination of a plurality of combination determination result numbers (consisting of one or a plurality of game combinations or losers (except when no loser is set)). It means a selection act (also called a lottery) such as a lottery performed using an electronic device or the like in order to randomly select one or more combination determination result numbers. Here, the combination determination result number is one or a plurality of game combinations that are allowed to be established in the game in which the combination determination result number is selected (hereinafter referred to as “permitted formation combination”, “winning combination”, etc.). It prescribes.

  In addition, “establishment” in the case where “game player is established”, “game player is established”, or the like is referred to as a game player corresponding to the selected combination determination result number (game player with a game medal payout ( The combination of symbols (corresponding symbols) that constitutes a winning combination (such as a small role) or a non-paying gamer (re-gamer or special role)) is a predetermined stop mode (for example, on the effective line described later) It is used as a concept indicating that the images are displayed in the form of ( However, regarding the timing of establishment, for example, when the reel stop operation is performed at a timing at which the corresponding symbol of the game player can be stopped and displayed on the active line, or the corresponding symbol of the game player stops on the active line It is possible to set an appropriate timing such as a point in time when the slot machine recognizes that the corresponding symbol of the game player is stopped and displayed on the active line, or a point when the identified result is stored in the storage area. .

  Further, in the following description, a rule necessary for playing a game among a game medal insertion operation (manipulation operation) to a medal insertion slot 21 described later and a credited (stored) game medal by a player. The pressing operation of the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 for providing a number of gaming medals for gaming is collectively referred to as a betting operation. In addition, this betting operation, a player's pressing operation of a clearing switch 24, a tilting operation of a start lever (also referred to as “start switch”) 25, and pressing operations of stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are collectively referred to as a game. This is called operation. In general, “injection” in a slot machine is used to mean that a game medal is “inserted into the slot machine”, and a case where the game medal is used to mean “used for gaming”. There is. In the following explanation, basically, the word “insert” is used in the former meaning, and the word “bet” is used in the latter meaning.

  In the following description, the “payout number” of game medals means the number of game medals scheduled to be paid out in one game. The act of paying out game medals includes the act of actually paying out game medals from the slot machine (hereinafter referred to as “actual payout” as appropriate), and game medals stored in the slot machine, There is an act of increasing the numerical value stored electromagnetically (hereinafter, referred to as “storage addition payout” as appropriate).

  In the following description, “total number of game medals” means the difference between the total number of game medals paid out and the total number of game medals bet in a predetermined period (can be set arbitrarily). To do. However, the total number of game medals paid out during a predetermined period may be the total number acquired here.

  In the following description, “freeze” means a state in which execution of a predetermined control process related to the progress of a game is delayed for a certain time. In this embodiment, every time the RB operation (RB game) is finished during the BB operation described later, a waiting time at the end of the RB operation described later is set as this freeze. While the freeze is set, the game operation by the player is not accepted effectively.

<< First Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, a basic configuration of the slot machine according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
<Appearance of slot machine>
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a front door 2 attached to the front surface of the main body casing so as to be openable and closable. The upper panel assembly 10, the middle panel assembly 20, the lower panel assembly 30, and the tray assembly 40 are attached.

  A display screen 11a of an image display device 11 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side of the upper panel assembly 10 is disposed at the center of the upper panel assembly 10 so as to face the front. Effect lamp 12, second effect lamps 13a and 13b, and third effect lamps 14a and 14b are arranged. A pair of upper speakers 15a and 15b are disposed on the lower left and right of the display screen 11a.

  A display window W facing the surfaces of the three reels 3a, 3b, 3c arranged side by side in the main body housing is provided at the center of the middle panel assembly 20, and below the display window W is provided. Includes a medal slot 21 for inserting game medals (game media), a 1-BET switch 22 for betting one game medal within the credited range, and a maximum bet allowable number (for example, three). The MAX-BET switch 23 for betting game medals at once, the clearing switch 24 for paying out bet game medals and / or credited game medals, and all reels 3a, 3b, 3c are started to rotate. A start lever (start switch) 25 which is operated at the time, and three stop switches 26 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels 3a, 3b and 3c. , 26b, 26c (the left stop switch 26a corresponds to the reel 3a, the center stop switch 26b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the right stop switch 26c corresponds to the reel 3c), and the medal slot 21. A reject switch 27 and the like are provided for returning game medals that have been thrown in and retained.

  The inside of the medal insertion slot 21 is used when an inserted game medal is accepted effectively, and when the inserted game medal is not accepted, and when the inserted game medal is not accepted. The branch is branched to a return passage through which the game medal passes (which leads to a game medal payout port 41 described later), and a blocker 48 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the branch portion. The blocker 48 guides the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 to the receiving passage during a period in which the inserted game medals are effectively accepted, and inserts it into the medal slot 21 during other periods. In order to guide the game medal to the return passage, the receiving passage and the return passage are selectively configured so that one can be opened and the other can be closed. In the following description, the blocker 48 is in an ON state indicates a state in which a game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 is guided to a receiving passage (a state in which a game medal can be received), and the blocker 48 is in an OFF state. It is assumed that the game medal inserted into the mouth 21 is guided to the return path (game medal unacceptable state).

  In addition, inside the medal insertion slot 21, three insertion medal sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c (see FIG. 2) for detecting game medals are provided. The inserted medal sensor 28a detects that a game medal has been inserted into the medal slot 21, and is on the upstream side of the position where the blocker 48 is installed on the passage where the inserted game medal flows down. In place. The inserted medal sensor 28b detects that the game medal inserted into the medal slot 21 is guided into the receiving passage and is effectively received, and is located downstream of the position where the blocker 48 is installed (described later). It is arranged at a position near the hopper 50. The inserted medal sensor 28c detects that a game medal inserted into the medal slot 21 has passed through a branch portion between the receiving passage and the return passage, and in the vicinity of the branch portion (position where the blocker 48 is installed). (Position slightly closer to the inserted medal sensor 28b).

  If both the inserted medal sensor 28a and the inserted medal sensor 28b detect a game medal, it means that the game medal has been inserted into the medal slot 21 and the inserted game medal has been accepted effectively. On the other hand, when the inserted medal sensor 28a detects a game medal, but the inserted medal sensor 28b does not detect a game medal, the game medal is inserted into the medal slot 21, but the inserted game medal is effectively accepted. Means that it has been returned. Further, when the three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c detect the passage of game medals in a different order from the predetermined order (the order of 28a, 28c, 28b), or the passage of game medals with some inserted medal sensors. If is not detected, it means that an abnormal passage such as a game medal flowing backward has occurred.

  The display window W is configured such that when all three reels 3a to 3c are stopped, three symbols for each reel, a total of nine symbols, are displayed so as to be visible from the player. A winning line 29 that connects the symbol display areas of the lower stage of the reel 3a, the middle stage of the reel 3b, and the upper stage of the reel 3c to the upper right is a winning line that is activated when a specified number of game medals are betted. Whether or not a game combination is established is determined based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the winning line 29. Hereinafter, the activated winning line 29 is appropriately referred to as an “effective line 29”.

  In the slot machine 1, various display lamps configured by LED lamps or the like are arranged. In the present embodiment, as the display lamps, a MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a, a BET number display lamp 46b, a throw-in display lamp 46c, a game start display lamp 46d, a re-game display lamp 46e, a status display lamp 46f, and a count display lamp. 46g, a stored number display lamp 46h, and a payout number display lamp 46j. These display lamps are configured to be controlled by a main control board 60 (main control means 100) described later.

  The MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a is lit up in a situation where a game medal can be betted, and is placed inside the MAX-BET switch 23. When the MAX-BET switch 23 is lit, the MAX-BET switch 23 is partially or entirely turned on. It is designed to shine. Other display lamps are arranged on the side or lower portion of the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

  The BET number display lamp 46b (hereinafter also referred to as “BET lamp 46b”) displays the number of game medals bet, and is a 1-BET display that is lit when one or more game medals are bet. The lamp 46bA is composed of a 2-BET display lamp 46bB that is turned on when two or more sheets are used, and a MAX-BET display lamp 46bC that is turned on when there are three or more sheets. The insertable display lamp 46c is lit in a situation where a game medal can be inserted, and the game start display lamp 46d is lit in a situation where the start lever 25 can be operated to start a game. It is what is done. The re-game display lamp 46e is turned on when a re-game player described later is established in an arbitrary game and a game medal is automatically bet by an automatic bet process described later.

  For example, the status display lamp 46f is turned on when an AT described later is set, and is turned off when the AT is finished. The number display lamp 46g is an AT game number described later when the AT is set. The initial value (“50”) is displayed and the display value of the number of games and AT games is decremented by 1 (except during BB operation described later), and when the number of additional AT games is determined The number added is added and displayed. The stored number display lamp 46h (hereinafter also referred to as “CRE lamp 46h”) displays the number of stored (credited) game medals in seven segments, and is a payout number display lamp 46j (hereinafter also referred to as “WIN lamp 46j”). ) Is a seven-segment display of the number of game medals to be paid out when a small combination described later is established.

  The WIN lamp 46j is also configured to display a character (alphabet) indicating the type of error when an abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. The errors set in the present embodiment include a hopper empty error in which a game medal in the hopper 50 is empty, a game medal payout error in which a game medal is paid out at a timing other than the original payout timing, and the inside of the medal insertion slot 21 Game medal retention error, game medal intrusion from a position different from the medal slot 21, game medal abnormal passing error in the direction different from the original route, game in the hopper 50, etc. There are an auxiliary storage full error that the medals are full, a rotation stop error that does not stop the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c at a predetermined position, a set value error that is a set value outside a predetermined numerical range, and the like.

  Further, the WIN lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a pressing order number, which will be described later, indicating the operating order (pressing order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. Hereinafter, the WIN lamp 46j for displaying the push order number is appropriately referred to as a “main-side push order indicator”.

  A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the center portion of the lower panel assembly 30, and decorative lamps 32 a and 32 b are arranged on the left and right ends thereof. A translucent lower panel base and a lower panel illumination lamp (both not shown) provided with a predetermined pattern are attached to the back side of the lower panel cover 31, and the lower panel illumination lamp is turned on. By doing so, the design of the lower panel base is illuminated from the rear side.

  The tray assembly 40 is provided with a game medal payout opening 41 for paying out game medals and a game medal storage tray 42 for storing game medals facing the game medal payout opening 41. An ashtray 43 is provided on the left of the game medal storage tray 42. In addition, on the left and right sides of the game medal payout opening 41, speaker openings 45a made up of a large number of small holes are opposed to the front surfaces of a pair of lower speakers 44a and 44b (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side of the tray assembly 40. 45b are formed.

  Further, a hopper 50 (see FIG. 2) for paying out game medals obtained when a predetermined prize mode is configured as a result of the game is provided in the main body housing. A medal detection unit 51 (see FIG. 2) for detecting game medals is provided. Further, the hopper 50 has a function of physically storing game medals that have been inserted and received effectively. Further, an auxiliary storage 85 (see FIG. 2) for storing game medals overflowing from the hopper 50 is provided near the hopper 50, and the auxiliary storage 85 is full (from the auxiliary storage 85). A full detection unit 86 (see FIG. 2) for detecting whether or not game medals are likely to overflow) is provided.

<Reel>
Each reel 3a, 3b, 3c is configured to rotate by driving stepping motors 35a, 35b, 35c (see FIG. 2). Each reel 3a, 3b, 3c is made of a light-transmitting member, and a light-transmitting reel tape having a plurality of kinds of symbols (see FIG. 3) is displayed on the outer peripheral surface thereof. It is pasted. Further, back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c (see FIG. 2) are arranged on the inner surface side of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c, and the display window is turned on by lighting the back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c. The area of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c facing the inside of W is illuminated entirely from the inner surface side, or a predetermined symbol combination (for example, on the effective line 29, which is stopped and displayed on each reel 3a, 3b, 3c, Only a partial area of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c is illuminated so that a game symbol corresponding to a winning line different from that on the active line 29 is conspicuous.

<Basic operations for playing games>
In order to play a game in the slot machine 1, first, a bet is made by actually inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot 21, or one of the 1-BET switch 22 and the MAX-BET switch 23 is operated, and the credit range. The betting line 29 of the plurality of paying lines is activated by betting a prescribed number of game medals within. In the present embodiment, the prescribed number of game medals required to activate the winning line 29 is set to 3 in any of the non-RT and RT1 to RT5 game states described later. However, the specified number is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as setting the specified number to a different value according to the RT state. Further, the pay line to be activated may be changed according to the number of game medals bet.

  Next, when the player operates the start lever 25, the number of bets is fixed (the betted game medals are used for the game), and a combination determination process described later is performed. Thereafter, the minimum game time is After confirming that the reels have elapsed, the reels 3a to 3c start rotating, and a plurality of types of symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 3a to 3c move up and down in the display window W (usually from top to bottom). Moved and displayed. When the rotation of the reels 3a to 3c reaches a predetermined speed and becomes a constant speed rotation, the stop switches 26a to 26c are activated (the operation of the stop switch can be effectively accepted), and the player can stop the stop switch 26a. Is operated so that the rotation of the reel 3a stops, the operation of the stop switch 26b stops the rotation of the reel 3b, and the operation of the stop switch 26c stops the rotation of the reel 3c.

  Here, when the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the active line 29 is in a predetermined winning mode (corresponding symbol of a game player who can acquire game medals), the number corresponding to each winning mode. Game medals are paid out by the hopper 50 or added as credits.

<Connection between control board and each device>
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control board for controlling the slot machine 1 includes three control boards: a main control board 60, a sub-main control board 70A, and a sub-sub control board 70B. Main control board 70A and sub-sub control board 70B are collectively referred to as sub-control board 70). Main control related to the progress of the game (including drive control of reels 3a to 3c and role determination processing) is performed by a control circuit arranged on the main control board 60, and illumination by lamps such as back lamps 38a to 38c. Control and the like are performed by a control circuit provided on the sub-main control board 70A. The effect image display control by the image display device 11 and the sound generation control from the speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b are mainly configured to be performed by a control circuit disposed on the sub-sub control board 70B. Yes. Further, information transmission between the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70 can be performed only in one direction from the main control board 60 to the sub main control board 70A. Information transmission to and from the control board 70B can be performed in both directions.

  The main control board 60 includes a main CPU 61 that performs various arithmetic processes related to games, a ROM 62 that is a read-only storage device that stores a control program and the like, and a RAM 63 that is a storage device that can write and read information. The drive circuit and the like operate according to a control program stored in the ROM 62, and control related to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 is performed. The ROM 62 and the RAM 63 are nonvolatile storage devices, and are configured to hold stored information even when power is not supplied.

  The main CPU 61 is used for a clock pulse generator 64 for generating drive pulses, a frequency divider 65 for frequency-dividing the drive pulses generated by the clock pulse generator 64, a role determining process (role lottery), and the like. A random number generator 66 for generating random numbers and a sampling circuit 67 for sampling the random numbers generated by the random number generator 66 and performing a lottery are connected. The clock pulse generator 64 and the frequency divider 65 are configured to function also as an interval timer for causing the main CPU 61 to generate an interrupt every predetermined time. The main CPU 61 executes a predetermined interrupt process in accordance with a pulse (clock signal) from the interval timer, and updates or resets time data of various set timers. The main CPU 61 transmits signals to the motor drive circuit 36a, the display lamp control circuit 47, the hopper drive circuit 52, and the sub control board 70 through the interface circuit 68, and the reel position detection circuits 37a and 37b. , 37c, the payout detection signal circuit 53, and the storage state signal circuit 87.

  Here, the motor drive circuit 36a is a circuit for performing rotation / stop control of the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c for rotating and driving the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, and the display lamp control circuit 47 is as described above. This is a circuit for controlling various display lamps. The reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, and 37c determine the rotational positions of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c based on detection signals from reel sensors (not shown) installed on the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c. The detection circuit 37a corresponds to the reel 3a, the detection circuit 37b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the detection circuit 37c corresponds to the reel 3c. The hopper driving circuit 52 is a circuit that drives the hopper 50 to pay out a game medal when a winning combination such as a small role is established. The payout detection signal circuit 53 receives a game medal from the hopper 50. This is a circuit that transmits a payout detection signal to the main control board 60 when the medal detection unit 51 detects that the payout has been made. Further, the storage state signal circuit 87 is a circuit that transmits a storage state signal indicating whether or not the auxiliary storage 85 is full to the main control board 60 according to the detection result of the full detection unit 86. .

  Further, the slot machine 1 is supplied with power from the power supply device 80 via the main control board 60. A power switch 81, a reset switch 82, and a setting key type switch 83 are connected to the power supply device 80, and a signal from each of these switches is transmitted to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. ing. Further, the main CPU 61 is configured to receive a signal from the setting change switch 84 via the interface circuit 68.

  The power switch 81 is a switch that accepts power-on and power-off operations from the power supply device 80 to the slot machine 1, and the reset switch 82 removes the cause of the error when a predetermined error occurs in the slot machine 1. This switch is operated by a game clerk when the error is resolved. When the reset switch 82 is operated, the error occurrence information stored in the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70 is cleared, and accordingly, the process at the time of error elimination is performed in the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70. Executed. The setting key type switch 83 is a switch operated when confirming and changing the setting of the role determination probability (game player winning probability) and the like, and the setting change switch 84 sets the role determination probability and the like. , For example, a switch for changing in six stages.

  The setting key type switch 83 is operated in the ON state when the front door 2 is open (hereinafter referred to as “door open state”) and power is supplied to the slot machine 1 (power switch 81 is ON). By doing so, the setting can be confirmed. Further, when the door is open and power is not supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is OFF), the setting key switch 83 is operated to be ON, and the power switch 81 is ON in that state. The setting can be changed by operating to the state (power is turned on to the slot machine 1). The setting key type switch 83 can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by inserting a predetermined key member (setting key) into a predetermined lock member provided on the main body side and rotating the key member. Yes. In addition, setting confirmation and setting change cannot be executed in a state where a game is being executed (a state where a game medal is bet (including a case where an automatic bet is placed) or a state where a reel is rotating) It can be executed only in a game standby state.

  The power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the sub main control board 70A via the main control board 60, and further supplied to the sub sub control board 70B via the sub main control board 70A (power supply apparatus 80). Power may be directly supplied to the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B). A supply voltage monitoring circuit for monitoring a voltage supply state on a circuit for supplying power from the power supply device 80 to the main control board 60 and on a circuit for supplying power to the sub main control board 70A via the main control board 60 (Not shown) are provided. Each supply voltage monitoring circuit determines that the power supply is cut off when the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage value, and outputs a power cut detection signal to the main CPU 61 and a sub-main CPU 71 described later. In addition, each supply voltage monitoring circuit, when the supply voltage is restored to a predetermined voltage value (a value different from the voltage value for power-off determination (for example, a higher value, but may be the same value)) It is determined that the power is turned on, and a power-on detection signal is output to the main CPU 61 and the sub main CPU 71. It should be noted that the voltage value when detecting power-off of the main control board 60 is set to a value higher than the voltage value when detecting power-off of the sub-main control board 70A, and before the sub-main control board 70A. The main control board 60 is configured to perform a process (power-off process) programmed to be executed when the power is turned off (the same may be applied to turning on the power).

  Further, the main CPU 61 is connected to or mounted on the switch board 90, the reel stop signal circuit 91, the start lever 25, the inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c, and the 1-BET switch 22. The signals from the MAX-BET switch 23 and the clearing switch 24 are input via the interface circuit 68.

  Further, a blocker 48 is connected to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68, and this blocker 48 is configured to be ON / OFF controlled. In the following description, a signal for ON / OFF control of the blocker 48 is appropriately referred to as a “blocker signal”. Further, although not shown, the slot machine 1 is provided with a door sensor for detecting the open / closed state of the front door 2, and a signal from the door sensor is input to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. It has become so. The main CPU 61 determines whether the front door 2 is in a closed state (hereinafter referred to as “door closed state”) or an open state (door open state) based on a signal from the door sensor.

  Although not shown, the main CPU 61 sets an external connection terminal board or the like to the data counter, hall computer, etc. when a predetermined gaming state (for example, an AT or bonus gaming state described later) is reached. A predetermined signal (hereinafter referred to as an “outer end signal” as appropriate), and the outer end signal can be used to manage the number of times set in a predetermined gaming state, etc., or to present it to the player. It is configured.

  On the other hand, on the sub-main control board 70A, a sub-main CPU 71 that mainly performs various arithmetic processes related to production management, a ROM 72 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs and the like, and information can be written and read. A RAM 73 that is a storage device is provided, and each drive circuit and the like operate according to a control program stored in the ROM 72, whereby control related to management of image effects and sound effects in the slot machine 1 and control related to lamp effects. Etc. are to be performed. The ROM 72 and the RAM 73 are nonvolatile storage devices, and are configured to hold stored information even when power is not supplied. In addition, a clock pulse generator and a frequency divider (not shown) are connected to the sub main CPU 71. The clock pulse generator and the frequency divider generate an interrupt to the sub main CPU 71 every predetermined time. It is comprised so that it may function also as an interval timer for making it. The sub main CPU 71 executes a predetermined interrupt process in accordance with a pulse (clock signal) from the interval timer, and updates or resets time data of various set timers.

  The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to receive various signals from the main control board 60 via the interface circuit 74 and transmit signals to the lamp control circuit 18. Here, the lamp control circuit 18 is a circuit that controls lighting of the lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c.

  The sub main CPU 71 is configured to transmit various signals to the sub sub control board 70B via the interface circuit 74 and to receive various signals from the sub sub control board 70B. Hereinafter, a signal transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A is referred to as “control command”, and a signal transmitted from the sub-main control board 70A to the sub-sub control board 70B is referred to as “effect command”. A signal transmitted from the sub-sub control board 70B to the sub-main control board 70A is referred to as a “status command”.

  On the sub-sub control board 70B, a sub-sub CPU 75 that mainly performs various arithmetic processes relating to control of image effects and sound effects, a ROM 76 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs and the like, and information can be written and read. A random access memory (RAM) 77 is provided, and the drive circuits and the like operate according to a control program stored in the ROM 76, whereby control relating to image effects and sound effects is performed. Note that the ROM 76 and the RAM 77 are nonvolatile storage devices, and are configured to hold stored information even when power is not supplied.

  The sub-sub CPU 75 receives a notification signal or an effect signal from the sub-main control board 70A via the interface circuit 78, transmits signals to the display device control circuit 16 and the speaker control circuit 17, and also transmits the sub-main control board. It is configured to transmit a status signal to 70A. The display device control circuit 16 is a circuit that controls the image display device 11 to display a predetermined effect image, and the speaker control circuit 17 controls the type and volume of sound generated from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b. It is a circuit to control. The image display device 11 is also configured to function as a push indicator that displays the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c (hereinafter referred to as “sub-side push order indicator” as appropriate). Yes.

<Reel pattern arrangement>
In the present embodiment, symbols displayed on the reels 3a to 3c are arranged as shown in FIG. 3 (“left reel”, “middle reel” and “right reel” in FIG. 3b and 3c respectively). That is, each of the reels 3a to 3c includes “character”, “seven”, “bar”, “cherry”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, “bell”, “replay A”, “replay B”, and A predetermined number of 10 types of “blank” symbols are arranged. Note that “blank” may indicate an arbitrary symbol that does not constitute a game combination, but in the present embodiment, these are set as symbols that constitute a game combination. Hereinafter, the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c may be referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel, respectively.

<Type of gamer>
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 to 7, one special combination (BB combination), 13 replay combinations 1 to 13 replays, and 24 small combinations 1 to 24 small combinations. A total of 38 game combinations with a combination are set, and combinations of symbols (corresponding designs) for establishing each game combination, the number of game medals paid out when the game combination is established, and the like are as shown in FIGS. Is set to

  For the BB combination (BB is an abbreviation for big bonus), the corresponding symbol “character / character / character” (the names of the symbols constituting the game combination are described in the order of reels 3a, 3b, 3c; the same applies hereinafter). When the game is stopped and displayed on the line 29, the game medal is not paid out, and the RT state described later is set to RT5 (in BB) and the bonus game (BB game) is started there from the next game. It is a game actor that shows that. The BB game started when the BB combination is established ends when a gaming medal of more than 450 (the numerical value can be changed as appropriate) is paid out. Also, during this BB game, an RB game (RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus) is continuously executed internally (the RB game during this BB game will be described later).

  In the present embodiment, only the BB role is provided as a special role, but an RB role or an MB role (MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus) may be provided as another special role. Then, when the RB combination is established, it is set to start the RB game as the bonus game from the next game (the RB game that is performed separately from the BB game during the above-mentioned BB game), and the MB combination is established Then, an MB game as a bonus game may be set to start from the next game. The RB game in this case is terminated when, for example, a small role is established a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) or a predetermined number of times (for example, 12 times) of the game is completed. The game may be ended when a predetermined number (for example, more than 200) of game medals has been paid out. A plurality of special roles may be provided.

  When the re-game players 1 to 13 are established, the game medals are not paid out, but the game player (re-game player) allowed to perform the next game without reducing the number of game medals held by the player. It is provided as. The re-game players 1 and 2 are not set as a trigger for transition of the RT state, which will be described later. For this reason, the regame players 1 and 2 are appropriately referred to as “normal RP” (RP is an abbreviation for replay).

  As shown in the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3, the symbol “Bell / Watermelon B” (“/” means “or”) on the left reel, the symbol “Replay A” on the middle reel, which constitutes the replaying combination 1 ”And the symbol“ bell ”on the right reel are arranged every 5 symbols or less on each reel. Thereby, when the re-game player 1 is won, the corresponding symbol “bell / watermelon B / replay A / bell” is executed for each reel rotation stop operation (operations of the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c) (valid) Regardless of the timing received in step (the same applies hereinafter), it is possible to stop display on the effective line 29 (hereinafter referred to as “pulling in” as appropriate). Like this re-playing role 1, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch, the role that can draw the corresponding symbol (one of them when there are multiple sets) on the active line 29 is as follows: For convenience, it will be referred to as a “100% withdrawable game player”.

  The establishment of the re-game players 3 and 4 (the corresponding symbol being stopped and displayed on the active line 29) is a condition for shifting to the RT1 state described later. In addition, the establishment of the re-game player 5 is a condition for transition to the RT2 state described later, and the establishment of the re-game player 6 is a condition for transition to the RT3 state described later. Accordingly, the re-game players 3, 4, 5 and 6 are appropriately referred to as “RT1 transition RP”, “RT2 transition RP” and “RT3 transition RP”, respectively.

  The re-game combination 7 or 8 is selected as a winning combination in the game mode 0 (described later) (the combination determination result numbers 15 to 19 described below are selected) is set as an opportunity to execute the AT lottery described later. Yes. In addition, when the re-game player 7 is established, the symbol “cherry” is stopped and displayed in the middle / middle (middle middle) display area of the display window W (the stop switch 26a is also displayed in the lower right or right middle display area). Depending on the operation timing, “Cherry” is displayed in a stopped state), and when the re-gamer 8 is established, the symbol “Cherry” is stopped and displayed in the lower right display area in the display window W (the middle In the upper display area, “cherry” is stopped and displayed depending on the operation timing of the stop switch 26b). For this reason, the re-game players 7 and 8 are appropriately referred to as “cherry RP”.

  Re-game combination 9 is selected as a winning combination in game mode 0 (described later) (the combination determination result number 20-22 described below is selected) is set as an opportunity to execute AT lottery described below, This re-game player 9 is appropriately referred to as “chance RP”. The re-game players 10 to 13 are game players set according to the necessity for control, which are not established even if they are elected as winning players. This is referred to as “control RP”. Note that, as with the replaying role 1, the replaying roles 2 to 7 and 9 are game roles that can be pulled in 100%.

  The small combinations 1 to 3 are winning combinations configured such that nine game medals are paid out when established, and the small combinations 1 to 3 are collectively referred to as “9 small combinations” as appropriate. As is clear from the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3, when the corresponding symbol of the small role 1 is stopped and displayed on the active line 29, the symbol “bell” stops side by side in the lower display areas in the display window W. Is displayed. When the small combination 2 is established, the symbol “bell” is stopped and displayed side by side in each middle display area in the display window W. Further, when the corresponding symbol of the small role 3 is stopped and displayed on the active line 29, the symbol “bell” is stopped and displayed side by side in the upper display areas in the display window W. From such a symbol stop state at the time of establishment, the small roles 1, 2, and 3 are appropriately referred to as “lower bell”, “middle bell”, and “upper bell”, respectively.

  The small roles 4 to 8 are winning combinations configured so that one game medal is paid out when established, and the small roles 9 to 23 are winning configured so that 3 game medals are paid out when established. It is a role. Therefore, the small roles 4 to 8 are collectively referred to as “one-sheet small role”, and the small roles 9 to 23 are collectively referred to as “three-sheet small role” as appropriate. Further, the small combination 24 is a winning combination that is selected as a winning combination only during BB, which will be described later (“-” in the column of the number of payouts in FIG. 7A is not won (not a winning combination) )) As appropriate, referred to as “special small role”.

  As is clear from the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3, when the corresponding symbol of the small role 21 is stopped and displayed on the active line 29, the symbol “watermelon A / B” is displayed in each middle display area in the display window W. Displayed side by side and stopped. When the small combination 22 is established, the symbol “watermelon A / B” is stopped and displayed side by side in the upper right in the display window W. Further, when the corresponding symbol of the small role 23 is stopped and displayed on the active line 29, the symbol “watermelon A / B” is stopped and displayed side by side in the lower display areas in the display window W. From such a symbol stop mode at the time of establishment, the small roles 21 to 23 are collectively referred to as “watermelon small character” as appropriate. On the other hand, the small combinations 1 to 20 are collectively referred to as “bell small combination” as appropriate. In addition, the small roles 1 to 6 are game roles that can be pulled in 100%.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7B, specific symbols 01, 02, 03 are set. These are not game symbols corresponding to the winning combinations E1 to E6, which will be described later. As an eye, it is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29. Further, the specific symbols 01, 02, 03 are stopped on the active line 29 as a condition for shifting to the RT1 state described later.

<Selection result number selection probability>
8 to 11 show a correspondence relationship between the combination determination result number selected in the combination determination process and the corresponding name, winning combination, winning probability, and the like. Note that a plurality of selection probabilities (also referred to as “winning probabilities”) are set in accordance with the above set values set by a game clerk or the like. The selection probability values shown in the figure are examples corresponding to certain set values.

  8 to 11 (A) are set with 52 role determination result numbers for the re-playing winning combination / winning combination from the winning determination result numbers 0 to 51. In FIG. A role determination result number (a role determination result number 1) for the special role is set. Hereinafter, the former combination determination result number may be referred to as “winning / RP combination determination result number” and the latter combination determination result number may be referred to as “comb combination determination result number”.

  As shown in the figure, each game combination is associated with each combination determination result number as a winning combination. For example, the winning combination / RP combination determination result number 1 is associated with the re-playing roles 1 and 2 as duplicate winning combinations, and the combination determination result number 15 is associated with the re-playing combination 7 as the single winning combination, In the combination determination result number 1, the BB combination is associated with the single winning combination. The winning / RP combination determination result number 0 is associated with a loss (all game combinations are not won). Further, the names corresponding to the respective role determination result numbers are given for convenience in order to easily distinguish the respective role determination result numbers.

  The probability that each combination determination result number is selected is set for each RT state (non-RT, RT1 to RT5) to be described later, as shown. The numerical value of the selection probability indicates the ratio of the numerical value range assigned to each combination determination result number with respect to the entire numerical value range of the random number sequence generated by the random number generator 66 (for example, 65536 in decimal number). For example, the probability of selecting the combination determination result number 12 (name: replay D1, winning combination: replays 1 to 4) is “1 / 7.2” in RT3, and other RT states (non-RT, RT1, (RT2, RT4, RT5) is “0” (not selected) (the probability value is an approximate value and can be changed as appropriate).

  When winning decision / RP combination determination result number 1 (replay A) is selected, reel stop control is always performed to establish replay combination 1 regardless of the operation order (push order) of each stop switch. It is like that. Therefore, the winning / RP combination determination result number 1 (replay A) is appropriately referred to as “push order unquestioned RP”.

  The combination determination result numbers 2 to 6 (replays B1 to B5) are selected only at RT1, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If this is the case, the reel stop control is performed so that the re-game combination 5 that is the RT2 transition RP is always established, and if it is in the other push order, the re-game combination 1 or 2 that is the normal RP is always established. “Left”, “middle”, and “right” described in the remarks column of the role lottery table mean the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, and the arrangement order is the operation order (push order). Means. For example, “middle left and right” represents the pressing order in which the stop switches are operated in the order of 26a, 26c, and 26b, and “middle first” represents the pressing order in which the stop switch 26b is operated first (the second and subsequent pressing orders are It is a condition of expressing (unquestioned). Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 2 to 6 (replays B1 to B5), for the sake of convenience, the push order in which the replay combination 5 (RT2 transition RP) is established is “correct push order”, and the replay combinations 1 and 2 The pressing order in which (normal RP) is established is referred to as “illegal answer pressing order”.

  The combination determination result numbers 7 to 11 (replays C1 to C5) are selected only at RT2, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If this is the case, the reel stop control that always establishes the re-gamer 6 that is the RT3 transition RP, and surely establishes the re-gamer 3 or 4 that is the RT1 transition RP is performed. . Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 7 to 11 (replays C1 to C5), for convenience, the push order in which the replay combination 6 (RT3 transition RP) is established is “correct push order”, and the replay combinations 3 and 4 The pressing order in which (RT1 transition RP) is established is referred to as “illegal answer pressing order”.

  The combination determination result numbers 12 to 14 (replays D1 to D3) are selected only at RT3, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If this is the case, a reel stop control is performed in which re-game combination 1 or 2 (normal RP) that is a normal RP must be established, and re-play combination 3 or 4 that is an RT1 transition RP is always established if the other push order. It is like that. Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 12 to 13 (replays D1 to D3), for convenience, the push order in which the replays 1 and 2 (normal RP) are established is “correct push order”, and the replays 3 and 3 The pushing order in which 4 (RT1 transition RP) is established is referred to as “illegal answer pushing order”. Further, the combination determination result numbers 2 to 14 are collectively referred to as “push order RT transition RP” as appropriate.

  The combination determination result numbers 15 and 16 (replays E and F) are selected at RT1, RT2 or RT3. When the combination determination result number 15 (replay E) is selected, the replay combination 7 that is the cherry RP is always established regardless of the pressing order and operation timing of each stop switch, and the combination determination result number 16 ( When a replay F) is selected, regardless of the pressing order or operation timing of each stop switch, the replay combination 7 or 8 that is the cherry RP is always established (first, the stop switch 26a is operated and the left Reel stop control is performed when the symbol “cherry” is stopped and displayed in the lower display area on the reel). Hereinafter, the combination determination result numbers 15 and 16 are appropriately referred to as “weak cherry” and “strong cherry”, respectively.

  The combination determination result numbers 17 to 19 (replays G1 to G3) are selected only at RT3, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If this is the case, the reel stop control is performed so that the re-playing combination 7 that is the cherry RP is always established, and the re-playing combination 1 or 2 that is the normal RP is always established if the other pushing order. Hereinafter, the combination determination result numbers 17 to 19 (replays G1 to G3) are collectively referred to as “push order cherry RP” as appropriate.

  The combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 (replays H1 to H3) are selected only at RT3. When selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If so, the reel stop control is performed so that the re-playing combination 9 that is a chance RP is always established, and if it is in the other pushing order, the re-playing combination 1 or 2 that is the normal RP is necessarily established. Hereinafter, combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 (replays H1 to H3) are collectively referred to as “push order chance RP” as appropriate, and combination determination result numbers 2 to 14 (push order RT transition RP) The determination result numbers 17 to 19 (push order cherry RP) and the combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 (push order chance RP) are collectively referred to as “push order RP” as appropriate. The combination determination result numbers 15 to 22 are set in the later-described AT lottery execution opportunity to be selected in the game mode 0 described later, and the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 are the game mode 3 described later. Is selected as an opportunity to execute the AT lottery.

  The combination determination result numbers 23 to 40 (winning prizes A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6) are selected in each RT state other than RT5, and when selected, each is determined regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If the pressing order of the stop switch is a predetermined pressing order, one of the three small winning combinations 1 to 3 (included in the winning combination) must be established. Reel stop control for surely establishing any one of the small combinations 4 to 8 is performed. Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 31 to 40, for convenience, the pressing order in which any one of the small combinations 1 to 3 (9 small combinations) is established is “correct answer pressing order”, and the small combinations 4 to 8 (1 sheet). The pressing order in which one of the small roles is established is referred to as “illegal answer pressing order”. Moreover, the combination determination result numbers 23 to 40 are collectively referred to as “six-choice order bell” as appropriate. In addition, it is set to the execution opportunity of the below-mentioned pushing order hitting game lottery that the combination determination result numbers 23-28 (winning A1-A6) are selected in the game mode 3 mentioned later.

  In the present embodiment, when the effective line is one line and the stop switch is operated in the correct push order when the 6-select push order bell is selected, the number of payouts is the largest among the duplicate winning combinations. In the case of an incorrect answer pressing order, the number of payouts is reduced by preferentially withdrawing a symbol with a larger number of symbols set as a corresponding symbol in each of the corresponding winning winning combinations. A combination is established (number-of-pieces priority control). On the other hand, when multiple effective lines are provided, for example, a combination of symbols “any, bell, and any” (any indicates that any symbol may be used) is set as a small role 1 and a role is determined. If the result number 23 is selected, the corresponding symbol (for example, the bell symbol of the middle reel) is drawn on a plurality of active lines (overlapping positions) in the correct answer pressing order, and in the incorrect answer pressing order. A difference may be caused in the number of payouts by performing control for drawing the corresponding symbol of the winning combination (for example, the bell symbol of the middle reel) on a single effective line.

  The winning combination determination result number 41 (winning prize D) is selected in each RT state other than RT5. The reel stop control for surely establishing any one of the small combinations 1 to 3 (usually, the small combination 1) is performed. Hereinafter, the combination determination result number 41 (winning prize D) is appropriately referred to as “common bell”.

  The combination determination result numbers 42 to 47 (winnings E1 to E6) are selected in each RT state other than RT5, and when selected, if the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order, three small combinations ( Make sure that any of the small roles 9 to 12 in the winning prizes E1 and E2, any of the small roles 13 to 16 in the winning prizes E3 and E4, and any one of the small roles 17 to 20 in the winning prizes E5 and E6) is made. If it is in order, the corresponding symbol of the predetermined three small bonuses (see the remarks column in FIG. 11A) can be drawn on the active line 29 according to the operation timing of the stop switch (the probability is “1 / 4 ”), when the predetermined three small combinations are established and cannot be pulled in (the probability is“ 3/4 ”), one of the specific symbols 01 to 03 (remarks in FIG. 11A) The reel stop control to stop and display on the active line 29 as a missing line) Divide. Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 42 to 47 (winnings E1 to E6), for convenience, the pressing order in which any three small combinations are always established regardless of the operation timing is “correct pressing order”, and other pressings are performed. The order is referred to as “illegal answer pressing order”. Further, the combination determination result numbers 42 to 47 are collectively referred to as “3 selection push order bells” as appropriate, and combination determination result numbers 23 to 40 (6 selection press order bells) and combination determination result numbers 42 to 47 ( 3 selection push order bells) are collectively referred to as “push order bell” as appropriate.

  If any of the winning combination determination result numbers 48 to 50 (winnings F to H) is selected, the operation timing of each stop switch draws the corresponding symbol of the winning combination regardless of the pressing order of each stop. Depending on whether or not it is possible to insert, a reel control is performed so that any of the winning combinations is established or no combination is established. Hereinafter, the combination determination result numbers 48, 49, and 50 are appropriately referred to as “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, and “chance eyes”, respectively. The combination determination result numbers 48 to 50 are set to be selected in the game mode 0, which will be described later, as an opportunity to execute AT lottery, which will be described later.

  The combination determination result number 51 (winning prize I) is set to be selected only at RT5 (in BB). When this combination determination result number 51 is selected, nine small combinations (usually, small combination 1) are always established regardless of the pressing order or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (B), the combination determination result number 1 (BB01) of the combination is set to be selected in each RT state other than RT4 (inside BB) and RT5 (in BB). . When the winning combination determination result number 1 is selected, the operation timing of each stop switch indicates the corresponding symbol of the winning combination BB on the active line 29 regardless of the pressing order of the respective stop switches. The BB combination is established when it is time to retract. Note that once the winning combination determination result number 1 (BB01) is selected, the winning of the BB combination is carried over to the next game until the BB combination is established. In addition, in the state where the winning combination of the BB role is carried over, when a re-playing role or small role is elected as the winning role, the corresponding symbol of the re-playing role or small role is preferentially drawn onto the active line 29. Reel control is performed (the establishment of the BB combination may be prioritized).

Next, main feature configurations of the slot machine according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS.
<Functional block>
As shown in FIG. 12, the slot machine according to the present embodiment will be described mainly from a functional viewpoint. Mainly, a betting operation for betting a game medal (for example, a game medal insertion operation to the medal insertion slot 21). , 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23 pressing operation), reel rotation start operation for rotating each of the stopped reels 3a to 3c (for example, tilting operation of the start lever 25), a plurality of types of symbols Each reel rotation stop operation (for example, pressing operation of the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c) for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c that variably display the game medals that are betted or stored (credited). Corresponding to each game operation performed by the player, such as a clearing operation (for example, a pressing operation of the clearing switch 24) Operation signal output means 95 for outputting a signal (hereinafter referred to as “game operation signal” as appropriate), main control means 100 (corresponding to the main control board 60) for performing main control relating to the progress of the game, Sub-control means 200 (corresponding to the sub-control board 70) that performs predetermined effect control according to the situation is provided.

  The main control means 100 is roughly divided into a game state management means 110 that mainly manages game state, a game progress management means 130 that mainly manages game progress, and a main communication that controls communication in the main control means 100. Control means 150 is provided. Among these, the game state management means 110 includes a setting change / confirmation control means 111, an RT control means 112, a re-game operation control means 113, a bonus game control means 114, a freeze control means 115, a game mode control means 116, and an AT control means. 117 and test specification control means 118 are provided.

  Further, the game progress management means 130 includes an acceptance medal management means 131, a combination determination means 132, a game progress information determination means 133, a reel control means 134, a stop display symbol determination means 135, a payout medal management means 136, a blocker control means 137, A display lamp control means 138, a main side push order management means 139, a mask processing means 140, and a push order hitting game control means 141 are provided. The main communication control means 150 includes a control command sending means 151 and an outer end signal sending means 152. And a test signal transmission means 153. Each of the above-described units in the main control unit 100 includes a main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, hardware such as an electronic circuit, a control program stored in the ROM 62, and the like disposed on the main control board 60 shown in FIG. It is a functional representation of what is configured by software.

(Each means constituting the game state management means 110)
The setting change / confirmation control means 111 operates the setting key type switch 83 to be in the ON state, and the power switch 81 is in the ON state in that state, so that the setting value such as the current role determination probability is set. Each time the setting change switch 84 is turned on during the display, the setting value is changed in, for example, six levels (setting value 1 to setting value 6), and the changed setting is displayed. It is comprised so that a value may be displayed on a display. In this embodiment, when the setting is changed, the information related to the AT is cleared, but the information related to the RT state to be described later is held as it is, and after the setting is changed, the RT state before the setting change is restored. (The information regarding the RT state may be cleared, and after changing the selection, it may be returned to a non-RT described later).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the RT control means 112 is configured to control the setting of six RT states of non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4 (inside BB), and RT5 (in BB). Yes.

  Non-RT is an RT state that is a standard (normal state) in the present embodiment, and the probability that a re-game player (type is a re-game player 1 or 2) is won is a reference value (in this embodiment, approximately “1 / 7.33 ”). In this non-RT state, the process shifts to RT1 when the condition P1 is satisfied. The condition P1 is that any one of the specific symbols 01 to 03 described above is stopped and displayed on the active line 29.

  RT1 is a standard RT state similar to non-RT, and the probability that a re-game player (type is re-game player 1, 2, 5, 7, 8, 10-13) is the same value as non-RT ( Abbreviation “1 / 7.33”). In RT1, the process is shifted to RT2 when the condition P2 is satisfied. The condition P2 is that the corresponding symbol of the replaying combination 5 (RT2 transition RP) is stopped and displayed on the active line 29 (replaying combination 5 is established).

  RT2 is a standard RT state similar to non-RT and RT1, and the probability that a re-game player (type is a re-game player 1-3, 6-8, 9-13) is won is the same as non-RT and RT1. It is set to a value (abbreviated “1 / 7.33”). In RT2, the process is shifted to RT3 when the condition P3 is satisfied, and is transferred to RT1 when the condition P1 or the condition P4 is satisfied. The condition P3 is that the corresponding symbol of the replaying combination 6 (RT3 transition RP) is stopped and displayed on the active line 29 (replaying combination 6 is established), and the condition P4 is the replaying combination 3 Alternatively, the corresponding symbol of 4 (RT1 transition RP) is stopped and displayed on the active line 29 (re-game combination 3, 4 is established).

  RT3 is set to a value (substantially “1 / 1.53”) that has a higher probability of winning a re-gamer (type is re-gamer 1-4, 7-11) than non-RT, RT1, and RT2. RT state. During RT3, the process proceeds to RT1 when the condition P1 or P4 is satisfied.

  RT4 shifts from each RT state of non-RT and RT1 to RT3 when the condition P5 that the special role (BB role in this embodiment) is won and not established (corresponding symbol is not displayed) is satisfied. This is the RT state during the so-called bonus internal (during bonus internal winning). In this RT4, the probability that a re-gamer (type is re-gamer 1, 2) is won is set to a higher value than non-RT, RT1 and RT2, and lower than RT3 (approximately “1 / 1.94”). Yes. Also, the transition to RT5 is triggered when the condition P6 is satisfied during RT4. The condition P6 is that the BB combination is established (the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line 29).

  RT5 is an RT state (bonus game state) when the BB game is permitted to be played by a bonus game control means described later. In this RT5, it is set so that the combination determination result number 51 (winning prize I) that all the small combinations (small combinations 1 to 24) are elected repeatedly is selected. Also, during RT5, the process is shifted to non-RT when the condition P7 is satisfied. The condition P7 is that the bonus game state (BB game) is ended by paying out game medals exceeding a predetermined number (450).

  The re-game operation control means 113 is in a state that allows the next game to be performed without betting a game medal possessed by the player (the “re-game operation state is appropriately ")." When the re-game operation state is set, information indicating the re-game operation state (referred to as “re-game operation state information” as appropriate) is stored in a predetermined storage area (described later) of the RAM 63. It has become so. Hereinafter, storing the re-game operation state information is also referred to as setting or turning on the re-game operation state flag, and clearing (erasing) the stored re-game operation state information is referred to as re-game operation state flag. Is also referred to as clearing or turning off.

  The bonus game control means 114 is set to a state in which it is permitted to play the BB game from the next game (referred to as “BB operation state” as appropriate) when the BB combination is established, and the end of the BB game. The BB operation state is terminated when the condition (payout of over 450 game medals) is satisfied. Hereinafter, the setting of the BB operating state is also referred to as “BB operating”. Further, the bonus game control means 114 is configured to continuously execute the RB game during the BB operation. This RB game is internally controlled (not specifically notified to the player), the first game is started at the start of the BB game, and during the BB game (when the BB is in operation) Each time it is established twice, or every time two games are completed (that is, every two games), it is temporarily ended and resumed immediately after. Also, when the BB game ends, the RB game is controlled to end (regardless of the number of small roles established and how many games it is). In this embodiment, the RB game during the BB game is set to end every time a small role is established twice or every time two games are finished, but every time a small role is established eight times, Alternatively, it may be set to end every 12 games.

  Hereinafter, the state in which the RB game is executed is referred to as “RB operation state”, and the state in which the RB game is in progress is also referred to as “RB operation in progress”. When set to the BB operation state or the RB operation state, information indicating the BB operation state (referred to as “BB operation state information” as appropriate) or the like in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (described later) Information indicating the RB operation state (referred to as “RB operation state information” as appropriate) is stored. Hereinafter, storing the BB operating state information [RB operating state information] is also referred to as setting or turning on the BB operating state flag [RB operating state flag], and the stored BB operating state flag [RB operating state flag]. ] Is also referred to as clearing the BB operation state flag [RB operation state flag] or turning it off. Further, the above-mentioned replay operation state flag, BB operation state flag, and RB operation state flag are collectively referred to as an “operation state flag”.

  The freeze control means 115 executes a control process (for example, a process of accepting a bet operation, a reel rotation start operation, a reel rotation stop operation, etc.) related to the progress of the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied (condition satisfaction). It is configured to set a freeze that is delayed for a predetermined time. In this embodiment, every time each RB game performed during the above-described BB game ends, a standby time (details will be described later) at the end of the RB operation as the freeze is set.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the game mode control means 116 has a game mode 0 (normal time), a game mode 1 (a precursor), a game mode 2 (AT preparation), a game mode 3 (AT), and a game mode 4 (BB). Preparation), game mode 5 (BB), game mode 6 (preparation for special addition), and game mode 7 (specialization for addition) are controlled to control the setting of seven game modes (the words in parentheses are convenient names) It is configured.

  The game mode 0 is a non-AT mode (normal mode) set before winning an AT lottery described later. When the game mode 0 is set, the game mode 1 is shifted when the condition Q1 is satisfied, and the game mode 4 is shifted when the condition Q4 is satisfied. The condition Q1 is to win a later-described AT lottery, and the condition Q4 is to win the BB combination (corresponding symbol not displayed).

  The game mode 1 is a non-AT mode that is set when triggered by a later-described AT lottery (hereinafter referred to as “AT winning”). In this game mode 1, an effect (a precursor effect) that suggests that an AT is won (it is determined that an AT is set) is mainly performed by the sub-control means 200. ing. When the game mode 1 is set, the game mode 2 is shifted when the condition Q2 is satisfied, and the game mode 6 is shifted when the condition Q4 is satisfied. Condition Q2 means that the number of games (hereinafter referred to as “precursor G number” as appropriate) determined by lottery of AT precursor G number (“G number” means “number of games”), which will be described later, is consumed in game mode 1. It is to be done.

  The game mode 2 is an AT preparation mode that is set when the number of precursor Gs is consumed in the game mode 1 described above. When the game mode 2 is set, when the above push order RT transition RP is selected, the correct push order notification (hereinafter referred to as “replay navigation” as appropriate) or the above push order bell is selected. Is notified of the correct answer pressing order (hereinafter referred to as “bell navigation” as appropriate. Also, the replay navigation and the bell navigation are collectively referred to as “push order navigation” as appropriate). In the game mode 2, when the condition Q3 is satisfied, the game mode 3 is shifted to. When the condition Q4 is satisfied, the game mode 6 is shifted. The condition Q3 is that the stop switch is operated in a push order different from the correct push order that is set to RT3 or notified by the push order navigation.

  Game mode 3 is a mode during AT. When the game mode 3 is set, the number of games managed (counted) by an AT counter, which will be described later (hereinafter referred to as “AT game number” as appropriate), is set, and push order navigation is executed. When the game mode 3 is set, the game mode 0 or the game mode 1 (the game mode 0 or the game mode 1 (when the AT counter value becomes “0”) is satisfied when the game Q is consumed. If the number of AT stocks described later is “0” when the number of AT games is exhausted, the game mode 0 is entered, and if the AT stock number is “1” or more, the game mode 1) is entered, and the condition Q4 is satisfied. Then, the game mode 6 is shifted.

  The game mode 4 is a BB preparation mode that is set when the above condition Q4 (BB winning combination) is satisfied during the game mode 0 (thus, there is no AT winning). When the game mode 4 is set and the condition Q5 is satisfied, the game mode 5 is entered. The condition Q5 is that the BB combination is established (the corresponding symbol of the BB combination is stopped and displayed on the active line 29).

  The game mode 5 is a mode in the BB which is shifted from the game mode 4 (hence, no AT winning state) when the BB combination is established. When the game mode 5 is set, the game mode 0 is shifted when the condition Q6 is satisfied, and the game mode 2 is shifted when the condition Q7 is satisfied. The condition Q6 is that the BB game is ended in a state where there is no AT winning (each game AT lottery is performed in the game mode 5 as will be described later) (AT stock number = 0), and the condition Q7 is the AT This means that the BB game ends with a winning (AT stock number> 0).

  The game mode 6 is a special preparation mode for addition that is set in the game mode 1, the game mode 2 and the game mode 3 (hence, the AT winning state) is satisfied by satisfying the condition Q4 (BB winning combination). is there. When the game mode 6 is set and the condition Q5 (BB combination is established) is satisfied, the game mode 7 is entered. In this embodiment, when the game mode is switched to 6 (when the AT is selected and the game is shifted to the inside of the BB (RT4)), the correct answer push order notification (push order navigation) is basically performed. No (however, if an internal counter is provided separately and a special role (BB role) is won but is not established, the internal counter is set and the number of games until the internal counter reaches zero And may make it difficult to be aware that the game mode 6 has been entered). The reason why the push order is not notified in the game mode 6 is to reduce the payout rate inside the BB. On the other hand, if it is not necessary to reduce the payout rate inside the BB, the pushing order may be notified even in the game mode 6.

  The game mode 7 is an additional specialization (in which an increase in the number of AT stocks can be expected) which is shifted from the game mode 6 (and therefore the state where the AT is selected) when the BB combination is established. When the game mode 7 is set and the condition Q7 (BB game end with AT winning) is satisfied, the game mode 2 is entered. It should be noted that when the game mode 6 is shifted to the game mode 7, the AT stock number is incremented by “1”, and when the BB game is terminated and the game mode 7 is terminated, the AT stock number is decremented by “1”. It has become.

  When the AT control means 117 is set to the above-mentioned game mode 2, the condition Q3 is satisfied (this is different from the correct push order set by RT3 or notified by the push order navigation) The AT setting condition is that the stop switch is operated in the pressing order), and the AT counter for managing the number of AT games is set when the AT setting condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, the initial value is “50”). (The numerical value can be arbitrarily changed) (At this time, the game mode control means also shifts to the game mode 3). The fact that the setting condition of the AT is set to RT3 has the meaning that the AT is started at RT3, which is advantageous to the player, and the winning probability of the re-gamer is high.

  On the other hand, the AT setting condition that the stop switch is operated in a different pressing order from the correct answer pressing order notified by the pressing order navigation is also set for the following reason. That is, in the game mode 2, the AT counter is not set, but push order navigation is executed. For this reason, when only the transition to RT3 is set as an AT setting condition (the AT counter is not set even when a pressing order different from that notified in the gaming mode 2 is executed), the replay navigation is performed. As long as the player executes a pressing order different from the notified pressing order, the game mode 2 remains set because the player does not shift to RT3. When the game mode 2 is set, the bell navigation is also performed. Therefore, by following the bell navigation without following the replay navigation, it is possible to maintain a period in which the game medals increase permanently. Therefore, when a pressing order different from the notified pressing order is executed during the gaming mode 2, an AT counter is set (the transition to the gaming mode 3 is also performed) to start the AT. . In this case, the AT is started at non-RT, RT1, 2 where the winning probability of the re-gamer is lower than RT3. If the BB combination is won when the game mode 2 is set, the game mode 6 (or the game mode 7 if the BB combination is established) is entered, so that the player intentionally follows the push order navigation. If it is allowed to maintain the game mode 2 by not, there may be a situation in which the number of AT stocks increases without starting AT, so there is a meaning to avoid it.

  In this embodiment, the value of the set AT counter is decremented by “1” for each game (except in game modes 6 and 7), and the AT is terminated when the AT counter reaches “0”. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, the AT end condition is that the game for the number of AT games (50 games) has been consumed. As a change mode, a predetermined number of game medals were paid out during the AT period, a predetermined number of acquired medals (the total number of differences between the number of payouts and the number of bets) was obtained, and the predetermined number The execution of the bell navigator may be used as the AT end condition.

  In the present embodiment, when the BB combination is won or established and the game modes 6 and 7 are set while the AT counter is set, the AT counter is not subtracted as described above. Can also be used). In this way, when the AT is set, even if the BB combination is won or established, there is no loss for the player (after the end of the BB game, the AT is changed from the state before winning the BB combination. Can be resumed). In the present embodiment, as described above, even when the AT is set (the AT counter is set) by executing a pressing order different from the pressing order notified during the game mode 2, Also, although the push order notification is performed, the notification of the push order may not be performed (the period during which the push order is not notified may be limited to only a few games).

  The test specification control means 118 determines whether the slot machine 1 is of a test specification or a mass production specification (a specific determination method will be described later), and a predetermined value is determined according to the determination result. Executes control processing (for example, setting a later-described winning information output period timer, etc., outputs a test signal to be described later if it is determined to be a test specification, but outputs if it is determined to be a mass production specification. (Details will be described later). Here, the test specification is, for example, a specification for a type test to determine whether or not a newly developed gaming machine (slot machine) conforms to a predetermined standard. The specifications for use (for amusement store installation). Note that the control program written in the ROM 62 has the same contents regardless of whether it is a test specification or a mass production specification.

(Each means constituting the game progress management means 130)
The received medal management means 131 is a game medal actually accepted among game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 21 (hereinafter referred to as “inserted game medals” as appropriate) (in this embodiment, guided to the receiving passage). The game medal detected by the inserted medal sensor 28b (hereinafter referred to as “accepting game medal” as appropriate) is controlled so as to be a directly bet game medal or a credit game medal. It is configured. In this embodiment, if the bet number (BET number) has not reached the maximum bet allowable number (in the embodiment, the bet number necessary for executing the game (the prescribed number “3”)), the accepted game medal If the bet number has reached the maximum bet allowable number and the credit number has not reached the maximum credit allowable number (“50” in the present embodiment), the accepted game medal is credited. It is comprised so that it may become a game medal to be played.

  In addition, in the game set in the re-game operation state, the acceptance medal management means 131 performs automatic bet processing (the number of game medals equal to the number of bets in the previous game without reducing the number of game medals held by the player. (A process of setting a bet state). If the bet number has reached the maximum bet allowable number and the credit number has reached the maximum credit allowable number, the inserted game medals are returned without being accepted.

  The combination determining means 132 has a plurality of combinations based on preset combination determination probabilities (selection probabilities, winning probabilities) triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 (the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively accepted). It is configured to perform a combination determination process for selecting at least one combination determination result number from among the combination determination result numbers. This combination determination process is performed by random number lottery using the random number generator 66 and the sampling circuit 67 shown in FIG. Specifically, after one random number (number) is acquired (latched and read) by the sampling circuit 67 from the random number sequence generated by the random number generator 66, the acquired random number is converted into a plurality of role determination result numbers. It is configured to determine which combination determination result corresponds to and select a combination determination result number.

  In the combination determination process, when one combination determination result number is selected, a game combination corresponding to the selected combination determination result number becomes a formation allowable combination in the game. Further, the information on the selected combination determination result number is stored in a predetermined storage area (described later) of the RAM 63. The area for storing the information on the winning combination determination result number is set separately from the area for storing the winning / RP winning combination determination result number information. Hereinafter, storing the information of the winning / RP combination determination result number [combination role determination result number], setting the winning / RP combination determination result flag [combining combination determination result flag] or turning it ON, etc. Clearing the stored information of the winning / RP combination determination result number [combination role determination result number], clearing the winning / RP combination determination result flag [combining combination determination result flag], or OFF And so on.

  The information on the winning / RP combination determination result number stored in one game is the end point of the game (in this embodiment, a game end check described later) regardless of whether or not a small combination or re-playing combination is established. Cleared at the time of processing) (Alternatively, it is cleared at the start time of the next game (for example, at the time of accepting the start lever operation), or the information of the combination determination result number selected in the next game is overwritten without being cleared. Or you can. On the other hand, once the information on the combination determination result number of the combination is stored, it is carried over to the next game while being stored until the special combination (BB combination) is established. In the present specification, the state where the information of the combination determination result number of the combination is carried over and stored is referred to as being in the state of winning the BB combination or being in the BB.

  The game progress information determining means 133 is mainly configured to execute various lotteries for determining information necessary for progressing the game. In this embodiment, as such a lottery, an AT lottery, an AT precursor G number lottery, and a push order game lottery are performed.

  The AT lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to set an AT. When the game mode 0 or 3 is set as described above, a predetermined role determination result number (in the present embodiment, a role is played during the game mode 0). The determination result numbers 15 to 22, 48 to 50, and in the game mode 3 are performed when the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22) are selected, and each game is performed when the game mode 5 or 7 is set. . Selection items and selection probabilities in the AT lottery are as shown in FIG. When the AT is won, “1” is added to the AT stock number for identifying the number of times that the AT can be set (the value of the counter set to count the AT stock number (initial value “0”) is “+1”. To be). As another mode, the AT winning selection probability may be set to a different value depending on the game mode, or a lottery for determining the AT winning selection probability may be performed separately.

  The AT precursor G number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games until the AT setting (precursor G number), which is performed when the AT winning is performed in the AT lottery in the game mode 0 described above. The selection items and selection probabilities in the AT precursor G number lottery are as shown in FIG. When the number of precursors G is determined, a counter (hereinafter referred to as “precursor counter”) for counting the number of precursors is set (the initial value is a value selected in the AT precursor G number lottery). The number is subtracted by “1” (the value of the precursor counter is “−1”). As another aspect, the number of precursor G may be set uniformly without performing the AT precursor G number lottery, or the precursor G number may not be set.

  The push order hitting game lottery executes a push order hitting game, which will be described later, when combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 (six choice push order bells) are selected when the game mode 3 is set. It is a lottery to decide whether or not. The selection items and the selection probabilities in the push order hitting game lottery are as shown in FIG.

  The reel control means 134 confirms that the minimum game time has passed, triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 (the operation of the start lever 25 has been accepted effectively), and then the reels 3a to 3a. 3c is started to rotate, and after all the reels that have started to rotate are in a constant speed rotation state, the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are sequentially operated (the operations of the stop switches 26a to 26c are effectively accepted). )), The corresponding reels 3a to 3c are sequentially stopped.

  The rotation stop control of each of the reels 3a to 3c is performed by operating the stop switches 26a to 26c based on each stop table (not shown) set (set) according to the winning combination determination result number selected by the winning combination determination process. This is performed in accordance with the order of pressing and operation timing. The reels 3a to 3c are stopped so that the reels 3a to 3c are stopped within a predetermined stop allowable time (for example, 190 milliseconds) from the timing when the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are operated (in this embodiment, (Within a maximum of 5 sliding frames).

  That is, as a result of the combination determination process, when a predetermined game combination is selected as an allowable combination combination, the corresponding symbol of the selected game combination is displayed on the active line 29 as much as possible within the allowable stoppage time. In the case of losing, the reels 3a to 3c are controlled to be stopped so that the corresponding symbol of any game combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line 29. In this embodiment, when a re-gamer or a small role is elected while the winning combination of the BB role is overtaken, the re-game role or the small role is given priority (the priority is higher for the re-game role but changed) Yes) The reel rotation stop control of the re-game combination priority or small role priority to be established is performed.

  The stop display symbol determining means 135 determines which symbol is stopped and displayed by the reels 3a to 3c, and a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the active line 29 is established. It is configured to determine whether or not.

  When a re-game player stands, information indicating that the re-game player's corresponding symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “re-game operation symbol”) is stopped and displayed on the active line (“re-game operation symbol display information” as appropriate) However, when the special combination (BB combination) is established, information indicating that the corresponding symbol of the BB combination (hereinafter also referred to as “BB operation symbol”) is stopped and displayed on the active line (as appropriate) “BB operation symbol display information”) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (which will be described later). Hereinafter, storing the re-game operation symbol display information is referred to as setting a re-game operation symbol display flag or turning it ON, and clearing the stored re-game operation symbol display information is referred to as re-game operation symbol display information. This is called clearing the display flag or turning it off. Similarly, storing the BB operation symbol display information is referred to as setting or turning on the BB operation symbol display flag, and clearing the stored BB operation symbol display flag clears the BB operation symbol display flag. Then, it is called turning off. Further, the re-game operation symbol display flag and the BB operation symbol display flag are collectively referred to as “operation symbol display flag”. The data of the operation symbol display flag is used to generate data of the above-described operation state flags (re-game operation state flag, BB operation state flag and RB operation state flag) (details will be described later), and at the start of the game of the next game It is cleared when the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted.

  The payout medal management means 136 adds the number of game medals according to the small combination established when the small combination is established, and adds the number of credits to the credit number when the credit number does not reach the maximum allowable credit number. When the number of credits reaches the maximum allowable credit number due to the payout, the payout is made by actual payout for driving the hopper 50 via the hopper drive circuit 52. In addition, the payout medal management means 136, when the clearing operation (pressing operation of the clearing switch 24) is effectively accepted, the number of game medals bet or the number of game medals credited to the hopper 50. It is designed to be refunded by driving.

  The blocker control means 137 outputs a blocker signal for controlling the blocker 48 described above, and switches the blocker 48 between an ON state (game medal acceptable state) and an OFF state (game medal unacceptable state). It is configured as follows. When the blocker 48 is turned off, the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 are guided and returned to the return path. However, insertion of a game medal is detected by the inserted medal sensor 28a.

  The display lamp control means 138 includes the above-described various display lamps (MAX-BET display lamp 46a, BET lamp 46b, throw-in display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, re-game display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, Control relating to turning on and off of the number display lamp 46g, the CRE lamp 46h, and the WIN lamp 46j) is performed via the display lamp control circuit 47. When the WIN lamp 46j is to function as a main-side push order indicator, the WIN lamp 46j is controlled by the main-side push order management means 139.

  The main-side push order management means 139 is a preset push order instruction number (any one of A0 to A9) according to the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process. A10 is selected as the push order instruction number to be determined in step (1). In this embodiment, each push order instruction number is set as shown in the push order instruction number-corresponding push order-display content correspondence table of FIG.

  The push order instruction number A0 is selected when the push order is not notified, and the corresponding push order is “unknown”. The push order instruction numbers A1 to A6 are selected when it is desired to notify the first push order to the third push order, and the corresponding push order is set as shown in the table of FIG. For example, the corresponding pressing order of the pressing order instruction number A2 is “middle left and right”, and the corresponding pressing order of the pressing order instruction number A5 is “middle right”. Furthermore, the push order instruction numbers A7 to A9 are selected when a push order hitting game described later is performed, and the corresponding push order is “left?” (The first push order is “left”). And the rest is unknown), “middle ??” (first push order is “medium” and the rest is unknown), and “right?” (First push order is “right” and the rest is unknown). The pressing order instruction number A10 is not selected by the main-side pressing order management means 139, and is used to notify the symbol “character” to be aimed by pushing in the inside of the BB (there is no corresponding pressing order). It is determined on the (sub-control means 200) side.

  The correspondence relationship between the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process and the pressing order instruction number selected by the main-side pressing order management means 139 is shown in the combination determination result number-pressing order instruction number correspondence table of FIG. It is as follows. As shown in the drawing, the selected push order instruction number differs depending on the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process in the above-described game modes 2 and 3. For example, when the combination determination result number 7 is selected, the push order instruction number A1 is selected. When the combination determination result number 32 is selected, the push order instruction number A4 is selected, and the combination determination result number 1, When 15-22, 48-51 (corresponding to “Others” in the table) is selected, the push order instruction number A0 is selected.

  Note that for the role determination result numbers 6, 11 to 14, two push order instruction numbers (one is shown with parentheses) are described, but in this embodiment, this is the push order instruction that is shown without parentheses. Although the number is selected, as an alternative, it means that the push order instruction number indicated in parentheses may be selected. In addition, for the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28, in addition to the push order instruction numbers selected when the push order hit game described later is not performed, the push order instructions selected when the push order hit game is performed. Numbers are listed in parentheses. For example, when the combination determination result number 25 is selected, only the push order instruction number A3 is selected when the push order hitting game is not performed, and when the push order hit game is played, the push order instruction number A3 is selected. In addition, the pressing order instruction number A8 is selected. On the other hand, in the above game modes 0, 4 to 7, the push order instruction number A0 is selected regardless of the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process.

  Further, the main-side push order management unit 139 causes the WIN lamp 46j to function as a main-side push order notifier, and notifies the selected push order instruction number. Specifically, the push order instruction number is notified using two 7-segment lamps (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “7-segment”) provided in the WIN lamp 46j. FIG. 18 shows an example of the notification mode. FIG. 18A shows a mode in which the push order instruction number A2 is displayed, in which “=” is displayed on the left 7 segment and “2” is displayed on the right 7 segment. FIG. 18C shows a mode in which the push order instruction number A8 is displayed, in which “=” is displayed on the left 7-segment and “8” is displayed on the 7-segment on the right. Note that “=” displayed on the left 7-segment is for distinguishing from the case where the payout number is displayed on the WIN lamp 46j. When the push order instruction number is displayed, the push order instruction number selected corresponding to the push order bell is displayed (in the case of the bell navigation), and the push selected corresponding to the push order RT transition RP. When displaying the order instruction number (in the case of replay navigation), the display mode may be changed so that it is possible to distinguish which is the same push order instruction number. For example, the position of “=” displayed in the 7 segments on the left may be set higher in the case of the bell navigation system. When the push order instruction number A0 is selected, the display by the WIN lamp 46j is not performed (refer to FIG. 16 for the correspondence between each push order instruction number and the display contents by the WIN lamp 46j).

  As another mode, the push order instruction number displayed by the WIN lamp 46j may be displayed in binary. For example, as shown on the right side of FIG. 18 (F), the push order numbers and the like are displayed in association with the bits (bits) 0 to 6 in the case of displaying in binary numbers for the lamps at the respective positions of 7 segments. . FIG. 18F shows a mode in which “0001001” (corresponding to the push order instruction number A9) is displayed in binary in the left or right 7-segment, and the lamp at the corresponding bit position is lit. . As a modification example, the combination determination result number may be displayed by the WIN lamp 46j.

  In the present embodiment, switching between when the WIN lamp 46j is used as a main-side push order indicator and when it is used as a game medal payout number indicator is performed at the next timing. That is, after displaying the number of payouts in one game, the WIN lamp 46j is temporarily turned off when a bet operation is performed in the next game. A push order instruction number is displayed at an arbitrary timing from when the start lever 25 is operated until each reel enters the constant speed rotation state. Further, when all the reels are stopped, the WIN lamp 46j displaying the push order instruction number is turned off, and then the number of payouts is displayed according to the game medal payout process. When the bet operation is performed, the WIN lamp 46j is not turned off and the display is switched to “00” or the like, and when the start lever 25 is operated, the push order instruction number is displayed from that state. You may do it. Similarly, when switching from the display of the push order instruction number to the display of the number of payouts, the display of the push order instruction number is switched to the display such as “00” without turning off the WIN lamp 46j. The number of payouts may be displayed directly from the state of display or the display of the push order instruction number.

  The mask processing means 140 performs a mask process for replacing the information on the winning / RP winning combination determination result number selected by the winning combination determining process with the information on the effect group number (as another aspect, Mask processing may also be performed for the determination result number). This production group number is classified into a plurality of groups (classified according to the type of the winning combination), and the winning / RP combination determining result numbers selected by the determining process are assigned to each group. . The correspondence relationship between the effect group number and the winning / RP role determination result number is as shown in the effect group number-role determination result number correspondence table of FIG. As illustrated, in this embodiment, production group numbers 0 to 21 are set as production group numbers. Each production group number is associated with each type of winning / RP combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process. For example, the production group number 2 is associated with the role determination result numbers 2 to 6 (replays B1 to B6) in the RT transition RP, and the effect group number 11 is the role determination result number 21 (of the pushing order chances) ( The replay game H2) is associated with the effect group number 15 in association with the combination determination result numbers 35 to 40 (winning prizes C1 to C6) of the six-choice order bells.

  In this way, the mask process is performed to replace the winning / RP winning combination determination result number selected by the winning combination determination process with the effect group number, and information on the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200, as follows. There are significant advantages. In other words, the sub-control means 200 may change the background color or content of the image effect according to the type of game combination that has been won (permitted to be established) by the combination determination process. For this reason, the sub-control means 200 that has received the information on the production group number by associating the production group number according to the type of the winning / RP combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process, It is possible to determine the contents of the image effect according to the number information. For example, when the information of the production group number 19 is received, the production is performed so as to give the player a sense of expectation (strong production), and when the information of the production group number 18 is received, the player is expected. It is possible to decide to perform an effect that does not give a feeling (weak effect).

  In addition, by performing such mask processing, there are the following advantages. With regard to the role determination result number (push order RT transition RP or push order bell) that is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the pressing order, the effect group number is one effect for a plurality of role determination result numbers. Since group numbers are associated with each other, for example, it can be specified whether the winning order RT transition RP is won or the pushing order bell is won, but the winning decision result number corresponding to any correct pushing order is won. It is not possible to specify whether it has been done. That is, in spite of the fact that the push order is not actually notified in the non-AT, the information transmission path from the main control means to the sub-control means is illegally accessed and the information of the role determination result number (correct answer based on it) There is an advantage that it is possible to prevent fraudulent attempts to obtain information on the order of pushing). In this way, it is difficult to specify the correct push order that is advantageous to the player by removing the information about the operation mode (push order) of the stop switch from the information of the selected winning / RP combination determination result number in the mask process. Has the significance of making In the present embodiment, when the push order is not notified, the information of the push order instruction number A0 (push order unknown) is transmitted, thereby preventing the illegal acts as described above. It is possible to increase.

  Note that the mask processing in the present embodiment is not to rewrite (overwrite) the information of the winning / RP winning combination determination result number selected by the winning combination determination process and stored in a predetermined storage area to the effect group number. When the information on the winning combination determination result number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200, the information on the winning determination / RP winning combination determination result number stored in the predetermined storage area is read, and the read winning combination determination result number information is read. Based on the production group number information (production group number command described later), the production group number command is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “CB”. CB stands for command buffer). Is set to As described above, when the mask process is performed when the command is transmitted, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the production group number in the RAM or the like, so that an increase in the storage area can be suppressed. Of course, you may make it produce | generate and memorize | store the information of the production group number to transmit beforehand.

  As a modification example of the mask process, a combination determination result number for mask process may be used instead of the effect group number. The combination determination result number for the mask process is not selected by the combination determination process, but the combination determination result number (any one of 0 to 51) selected by the combination determination process is used as the combination determination result for the mask process. It is set to be used in place of a number. The correspondence relationship between the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process and the combination determination result number for mask processing can be set as shown in FIG. 20, for example. In the illustrated example, combination determination result numbers 52 to 73 are set as combination determination result numbers for mask processing (the winning names in the drawing make it easy to distinguish the combination determination result numbers for mask processing). For convenience). Each combination determination result number for mask processing is associated with each type of combination determination result number selected by combination determination processing. For example, the combination determination result number 55 (push order RT transition RP2 (mask)) is associated with the combination determination result numbers 7 to 11, and the combination determination result number 65 (six selection pressing order bell 1 (mask)) is the combination determination result. For example, the numbers 23 to 28 are associated with each other. In the case of this modified example, not the information of the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process but the information of the combination determination result number for mask processing associated with the combination determination result number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200. Is done. Even when such a combination determination result number for mask processing is used, the same effect as that obtained when the production group number is used can be obtained.

When performing the masking process, it is not necessary to associate one effect group number with a plurality of combination determination result numbers for the following winning / RP combination determination result numbers.
(1) A combination determination result number (for example, combination determination result numbers 1, 15 to 22) of a re-playing combination that does not affect the advantage or disadvantage of the game due to the difference in pushing order (no influence on the appearance).
(2) A winning combination combination determination result number (for example, combination determination result numbers 41 and 51) that does not cause a difference in the number of game medals acquired due to a difference in pressing order.
(3) The combination determination result numbers (for example, combination determination result numbers 48 to 50) of the winning combination with a small number of game medals that can be acquired (for example, less than the prescribed number of bets).
(4) The combination determination result number of the winning combination of (2) and (3) above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, mask processing is performed regardless of the game mode or the RT state (this can simplify the control program), but there is no need to notify the pressing order (for example, In game modes 0, 1, 4, 5, 6, and 7), a mask process is performed, and in situations where it is necessary to notify the pressing order (for example, game modes 2 and 3), the mask process is not performed and the combination is determined. The result number information may be transmitted to the sub-control means as it is.

  The pushing order hitting game control means 141 is configured to control the pushing order hitting game. A push order guessing game is a notification that hides part or all of the push order that is the correct answer push order, and when the player can execute the correct push order, the player is given a predetermined profit (of the game medium) In addition, an AT setting, an addition of the number of AT games, etc. In this embodiment, an AT stock number is added). In the present embodiment, in the above-described game mode 3, when the winning determination result numbers 23 to 28 (six selection pressing order bell) are selected, the winning order is determined in the pressing order game lottery executed. The game is set up. When the pushing order hitting game is set, the pushing order instruction number (any one of A7 to A9) for the pushing order hitting game corresponding to the correct answer pushing order is determined, and the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order designation number is determined. Notification (notification in a state where at least a part of the pressing order is turned down) is performed. Note that the sub (sub control means 200) side recognizes that the pushing order game has been set by receiving the pushing order number for the pushing order game.

  Further, in the push order hitting game, every time the player operates the stop switch, it is determined whether or not it is the correct answer pressing order. Sent to. On the other hand, when it is not the correct answer pressing order, failure information indicating that is transmitted. The sub-control means 200 that has received the information determines whether or not the pushing order game has succeeded based on the information, and performs an effect (a pushing order game success effect or a failure effect) according to the information. It has become. In addition, it is determined whether or not the correct answer is pressed, and the timing for transmitting success information or failure information corresponds to the operated stop switch after transmitting information indicating that the stop switch has been operated. The timing can be any time before the information indicating that the reel to be stopped is transmitted. On the other hand, it may be a timing after transmitting information indicating that the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch has stopped and before transmitting information indicating that another stop switch has been operated.

(Means constituting main communication control means 150)
The control command transmission unit 151 is configured to transmit a control command including various information related to the game at a predetermined timing. For example, as a control command to be transmitted when the start lever is operated, a control command including information indicating which game mode is set from among the game modes 1 to 7 (hereinafter referred to as “game mode” as appropriate). Control command (hereinafter referred to as “RT command” as appropriate) including information indicating which RT state is set to non-RT, RT1 to RT5, and information on the pressing order instruction number. Control command (hereinafter referred to as “pushing order instruction number command” as appropriate) and control command information (hereinafter referred to as “effect group number command” as appropriate) including information on the effect group number (the masked winning / RP winning combination determination result number). ), And a control command including information on a combination role determination result number (hereinafter referred to as a “combination role determination result number command” as appropriate). . In addition, collectively the role determination result number command of the effect group number command and the character object is referred to as a "role determination result command") there is. In addition to this, a control command including set value information, a control command including AT counter value information, a control command including AT stock number information, and a control command including information instructing the contents of effects executed in the sub-control means Or the like may be transmitted when the start lever is operated.

  In addition, the control command transmission unit 151 includes a control including information indicating that the first stop operation has been received when the first stop operation (operation of the stop switch for stopping the first reel) is received. A command (hereinafter referred to as “first stop acceptance command” as appropriate) is transmitted, and information on the first cylinder stop is included when triggered by the first cylinder stop (reel stop corresponding to the first stop operation). A control command (hereinafter referred to as “first stop command” as appropriate) is transmitted. Similarly, when a second stop operation (operation of a stop switch for stopping the second reel) is received, a control command (hereinafter referred to as “ A control command including information on the second cylinder stop (hereinafter referred to as appropriate) when the second cylinder stop (reel stop corresponding to the second stop operation) is triggered. (Referred to as “second stop command”). Similarly, when a third stop operation (operation of a stop switch for stopping the third reel) is received, a control command including information indicating that the third stop operation has been received (hereinafter referred to as “first” Control command (hereinafter referred to as “3 stop acceptance command”) and information on the 3rd cylinder stop (hereinafter referred to as “3 stop reception command”). A third stop command). Further, after determining the stop symbol, a control command including information on the stop display symbol (hereinafter referred to as “all stop command” as appropriate since it is used as a command indicating that the entire cylinder has stopped), A control command including information on the number of payouts (hereinafter referred to as “payout number command” as appropriate) is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, when the start lever is operated, a combination determination process is performed to select a combination determination result number, and a push order instruction number is determined based on the selected combination determination result number. It is like that. However, the command transmission to the sub-control means is such that the push order instruction number command is performed prior to the combination determination result command (effect group number command and combination combination determination result number command). . That is, the information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM in which the combination determination result number is preceded by the push order instruction number, but the set of information in the transmission buffer (CB) The number command is executed before the combination determination result command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the combination determination result number command of the accessory is used as a command indicating that the start lever has been operated, and the sub-control means receives the combination determination result number command of the combination. As an opportunity, an effect to be executed when the start lever is operated is started. As a result, it is not necessary to send a command indicating that the start lever has been operated as a separate command, so that the processing load on the main control means can be reduced. In addition, as described above, the sub-control means that receives the control commands in this order by transmitting the push order instruction number command before the combination determination result command precedes the effect processing based on the combination determination result command. It is possible to start a push order navigation effect, which will be described later, as an effect process based on the push order instruction number command, or to start a push order navigation effect, etc. during the effect process based on the combination determination result command. Note that communication between the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200 (sub main control unit 200A) can be performed only in one direction from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200 (sub main control unit 200A). Yes.

  The outer end signal transmitting means 152 is configured to transmit an outer end signal to a data counter, a hall computer or the like when a predetermined gaming state is reached. In the present embodiment, a BB signal and an RB signal are transmitted as the outer end signal. The BB signal is turned ON when the condition for shifting to the game mode 3 (AT) is satisfied, and when the condition for ending the game mode 3 (the condition for shifting from the game mode 3 to another game mode) is satisfied. Turned off. On the other hand, the RB signal is turned on when the BB combination is established, and turned off when the BB game is finished. However, when the game mode is shifted to the game mode 3 via the game modes 0 and 1 (non-AT state), the RB signal is also turned ON together with the BB signal. When the BB signal is ON, the BB signal is not turned OFF even if the BB combination is won, and when the BB combination is established, the BB signal is turned OFF and the RB signal is turned ON. This is because if the BB signal is turned off by winning the BB role, the player knows that the BB role has been won because the BB signal is turned off even though the end condition of the game mode 3 is not satisfied. Because it will end up. It is to be noted that a display lamp (referred to as a “bonus lamp”) managed by the main control means for notifying that the BB combination is won is provided, and the BB combination is established when the notification is already performed Even before, the BB signal may be turned off. However, when it is notified that the BB combination is won by the liquid crystal display managed by the sub-control means instead of such a bonus lamp, the BB signal is not turned OFF.

  When the slot machine 1 has a test specification, the test signal transmission means 153 is a signal for transmitting various types of information for testing to the test apparatus connected to the slot machine 1 (collectively referring to each signal). (Referred to as a “test signal” as appropriate). Examples of the test signal output in the present embodiment include a symbol stop test signal, an operating state test signal, and a winning information test signal. The symbol stop test signal is a signal for transmitting information on the optimal operation mode of each stop switch (information on the pressing order and the pressing position), and a predetermined output port for serial communication (appropriately “test output port SO0”). As a serial signal. The operation state test signal is a signal for transmitting the presence / absence of the re-game operation state, the presence / absence of the BB operation state, and the presence / absence of the RB operation state, and a predetermined output port for parallel communication (appropriately “test output port PO8”) To be output as a parallel signal. The winning information test signal is an item winning information (consisting of information on an item determining result number of an item and information on an identifier for making the test apparatus identify information on an item determining result number of an item), Alternatively, winning / RP winning information (consisting of winning / RP role determination result number information and identifier information for causing the testing device to identify winning / RP role determination result number information) is transmitted. And is output as a parallel signal from a predetermined output port for parallel communication (referred to as “test output port PO7” as appropriate).

  The symbol stop test signal is output only once in a symbol stop test signal output process (described later) that is executed when the start lever operation is accepted (the same signal is output a plurality of times (for example, twice) in succession). You may do it). On the other hand, the operation state test signal is output every time the timer interrupt process is executed in a timer interrupt process described later. The winning information test signal is also output every time the timer interruption process is executed, but the winning information in the state where the actual winning information (information of the role determination result number) is set (supported). The information test signal is output only for a predetermined period after the start lever operation is accepted (referred to as “winning information output period” as appropriate), and during other periods, the winning information test in which no actual winning information is set A signal is output (details will be described later).

  In the present embodiment, test signals other than the above test signals will not be described in detail. However, as other test signals, signals for transmitting the setting state of RT (referred to as “RT information test signals” as appropriate, which will be described later) Described in the second embodiment), a signal for transmitting the lighting state of various display lamps, a signal for transmitting the rotation state of each reel, a signal for transmitting a payout state of game medals, and a set value Signals for transmitting the above information are listed. From the testing device, a command signal for betting game medals, a command signal for starting rotation of all reels, a command signal for stopping rotation of each reel, a command signal for changing set values, etc. Each command signal for executing the game is output, and in accordance with each command signal, the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 200 perform each control process for executing the game (similar to the process performed in the mass production specification). Process).

  On the other hand, the sub-control means 200 is mainly a sub-main control means (also referred to as “first sub-control means”) 200A that mainly manages (instructs) lamp effects, image effects, and sound effects, and mainly image effects and sounds. Sub-sub control means (also referred to as “second sub-control means”) 200B that controls (executes) effects is provided.

  The sub main control means 200A is roughly divided into an effect management means 210 and a sub main communication control means 230. The production management unit 210 includes a sub-side push order management unit 211, a game production management unit 212, a notification production management unit 213, and a lamp production control unit 214. The sub-main communication control unit 230 includes a control command reception unit 231, An effect command transmission unit 232 and a state command reception unit 233 are provided. Each of the above-described means in the sub-main control means 200A includes the sub-main CPU 71, the ROM 72, the RAM 73, hardware such as an electronic circuit and the control program stored in the ROM 72 arranged on the sub-main control board 70A shown in FIG. It is a functional representation of what is configured by software such as.

(Means constituting the production management means 210)
When the sub-side push order management means 211 is set to any one of the game modes 2, 3, 4 and 6, the main control means 100 sends a predetermined combination determination result command and a predetermined push order instruction number. When a command is received, a push order instruction number different from the content of the received push order instruction number command can be uniquely determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, a combination determination result command (production group number command) including information on any of the production group numbers 1, 7 to 12 and a push order instruction including information on the push order instruction number A0. When a number command is received, it is possible to determine any one of the push order instruction numbers A1 to A6 instead of the push order instruction number A0. In addition, when a combination determination result command including information of combination combination determination result number 1 (combination combination determination result number command) and a push order instruction number command including information of the push order instruction number A0 is received. The push order instruction number A10 can be determined instead of the push order instruction number A0.

  As shown in FIG. 19, production group number 1 corresponds to winning / RP combination determination result number 1 which is a normal RP, and production group numbers 7 to 9 are combination determination result number 17 which is a push order cherry RP. To 19 and the production group number 12 corresponds to the combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 which are the push order chance RP. These winning / RP combination determination result numbers are combination determination result numbers in which the profit obtained by the pushing order by the player does not change (does not become advantageous or disadvantageous). Whether or not another push order instruction number is determined in place of the push order instruction number A0 is left to the judgment of the sub-side push order management means 211 (the main control means 100 may give an instruction). ). For example, in the game mode 6 (preparation for specialization), a symbol “character” to be aimed at in a game in which a result of determining the role of the losing game has been announced is provided on condition that the situation where the BB role is not established continues for several games. In order to do this, determining the push order instruction number A10 is an example.

  The game effect management unit 212 mainly executes an execution time of an image or sound effect (hereinafter referred to as “game effect”) executed by the sub-sub control unit 200B mainly for the purpose of improving the interest of the game or improving the game performance. Management is performed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Examples of game effects include continuous effects, single effects, assist effects, and the like.

  The continuous effect is an effect that continues over a plurality of game periods, and mainly displays an image that becomes a series of stories over a plurality of game periods using the image display device 11, For example, an image that displays an effect image or the like symbolizing that the vehicle is in the AT state can be used. When performing a continuous effect or a single effect described below, an effect using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b and the decoration lamps 32a, 32b is performed, or the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b are used. It may be performed by combining the productions.

  The single-shot effect is an effect that is executed once when a specific situation occurs in the progress of the game. For example, there is an effect that the image display device 11 displays an image that implies the winning expectation degree of the game player when each reel rotates. In addition, the value of the added AT stock number (for example, a character such as “+1”) is triggered by having won the AT in the AT lottery performed in the main control means 100 (added the AT stock number). The effect displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11 is also an example of the single effect.

  The assist effect is mainly an effect for assisting the player during the AT setting. In this embodiment, the assist effect is mainly information on the push order instruction number transmitted by the push order instruction number command from the main control means 100. Correspondingly, a push order navigation effect (referred to as the above push order navigation performed on the sub-control means side) is performed. This push order navigation effect is a single effect that displays the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number on the display screen 11a to the player using the liquid crystal display device 11 as a sub-side push order indicator. (The replay navigation effect as the above-mentioned replay navigation and the bell navigation effect as the bell navigation may be set to change the effect mode of both). When the sub-control means (sub-side push order management means 211) uniquely determines the push order instruction number, the push order navigation effect is performed according to the push order instruction number determined by the sub control means.

  As a specific mode of the push order navigation effect, for example, when the push order instruction number A2 (corresponding push order “middle left and right”) is determined, as shown in FIG. The numbers shown are displayed in the order of “1, 3, 2” from the left side, and when the push order instruction number A8 for the push order game (corresponding push order “medium ??”) is determined, FIG. As shown in D), the number indicating the first pressing order to be notified and the symbol “?” Indicating the second and third pressing order not to be notified are displayed side by side in the order of “?, 1,?” From the left side. Is given as an example. Further, when the pressing order instruction number A10 (designed character “character”) is determined, as shown in FIG. 18E, a character information “Aim the character!” Is displayed as an example. (Refer to FIG. 16 for an example of the display mode when other push order instruction numbers are determined).

  Further, when displaying from the first push order to the third push order, as shown in FIG. 18G, the player operates the first stop switch according to the displayed first push order. When the player presses the second stop switch according to the displayed second push order, the second push order is turned off, and according to the displayed third push order, the player takes the third push. When the stop switch is operated, the display of the third push order may be turned off. Further, if the player operates the stop switch in an order different from the displayed push order, the push order navigation effect may be immediately terminated. Furthermore, when displaying the pressing order, the sound “Naka”, the sound “hidari”, and the sound “migi” are output from the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. so as to match the operation timing of each stop switch. You may do it.

  The notification effect management means 213 mainly executes an execution timing of an image or sound effect (hereinafter referred to as “notification effect”) executed by the sub-sub control means 200B for the purpose of notifying the player of information related to the game. Management is performed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Examples of the notification effect include an error notification effect for notifying that an error has occurred by using character information such as “error occurrence”, and that an image is being prepared at the time of power-off recovery, such as “preparing an image”. For example, an effect that is notified by text information.

  The lamp effect control means 214 is configured to control various lighting effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, and 14b, the decoration lamps 32a and 32b, and the back lamps 38a to 38d.

(Means constituting sub-main communication control means 230)
The control command receiving unit 231 is configured to receive a control command from the main control unit 100 and store it in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for the received control command).

  Based on the control command from the main control means 100, the effect command transmission means 232 sub-sub-controls effect commands including various information related to effects (for example, effect commands including information on push order instruction numbers (push order)). It is configured to transmit to the means 200B.

  The state command receiving unit 233 receives a state command (for example, a state command including information that an effect command reception error has occurred) from the sub-sub control unit 200B, and a predetermined storage area (for example, reception) of the RAM 73 or the like. Stored in the command buffer for the status command).

  The sub-sub control means 200B is roughly provided with an effect execution control means 250 and a sub-sub communication control means 270 with respect to the sub-main control means 200A configured as described above. The effect execution control means 250 includes a game effect execution control means 251 and a notification effect execution control means 252, and the sub-sub communication control means 270 includes an effect command reception means 271 and a state command transmission means 272. Each of the above-described units in the sub-sub control unit 200B includes hardware such as a sub-sub CPU 75, ROM 76, RAM 77, and electronic circuit disposed on the sub-sub control board 70B shown in FIG. 2, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 76. It is a functional representation of what is composed of wear.

(Means constituting the production execution control means 250)
The game effect execution control means 251 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a, 15b, and the like based on the effect command from the sub main control means 200A and execute the above-described game effect.

  The notification effect execution control means 252 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a, 15b, and the like based on the effect command from the sub main control means 200A, and execute the notification effect described above.

(Means constituting sub-sub-communication control means 270)
The effect command receiving means 271 is configured to receive an effect command from the sub-main control means 200A and store it in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 77 (for example, a command buffer for the received effect command).

  The status command transmission means 272 is configured to transmit the status command described above to the sub main control means 200A.

  The transmission of the control command from the control command transmission unit 151 described above, the transmission of the production command from the production command transmission unit 232, and the transmission of the state command from the state command transmission unit 272 are all performed by a serial communication method (parallel). You may make it carry out by a communication system). Each of the transmission means 151, 232, 272 has the same configuration, and performs processing such as a command buffer (CB) as a storage area for temporarily storing a command to be transmitted, and writing and reading of the command to be transmitted. A command processing unit to perform and a command transmission unit to transmit a command by serial communication are provided.

  The CB has a plurality of storage areas distinguished by respective addresses, and is configured so that 1-byte command data can be stored in each storage area. The command processing unit generates command data to be transmitted, writes the command data in the address area indicated by the CB write pointer, reads the previously written command data from the address area indicated by the CB read pointer, It is configured to write to the TDR (transmission data register) of the transmission unit. The command transmission unit is configured to move the command data written in the TDR to a TSR (transmission shift register), and serially convert and transmit the data.

  One command in this embodiment normally has a 2-byte configuration (a checksum has a 1-byte configuration). The communication method is asynchronous (asynchronous), and has 1 stop bit and 1 parity bit (even parity) (communication method and command configuration can be changed as appropriate).

<Pressing order notification timing>
Next, the timing of push order notification (push order navigation) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, in the slot machine 1, the main control means 100 mainly determines the push order to be notified (some are also determined by the sub control means 200), and the push order is notified by the main control means and the sub control means. Both are supposed to be done. FIG. 22 shows basic push order notification timing. In the drawings and the following description, “main” and “sub” mean main control means and sub control means, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 22, when the start lever is operated, a game mode command (any one of game modes 1 to 7), an RT command (non-RT, any one of RT1 to 5) is changed from main to sub. RT command), push order instruction number command (if the push order is notified, any command of the push order instruction numbers A1 to A9, otherwise press command of the push order instruction number A0), production group A number command (any command of effect group numbers 0 to 21), a combination role determination result number command (a combination role combination determination result number 0 or 1 command) and the like are transmitted.

  The game mode command, the RT command, and the push order instruction number command described above are within the range indicated by the double-headed arrows in the figure (the push order instruction number command has been notified of the push order by the main-side push order indicator. Later), the order of transmission is arbitrary, but these commands are used to send the production group number command and the role determination result number command for the role (collectively, both are collectively referred to as the role determination result command). Is transmitted until the reel reaches constant speed rotation (in this embodiment, in order to ensure transmission before the reel reaches constant speed rotation, the combination determination result command Is sent before the rotation starts.)

  In addition, the first stop acceptance command, the second stop acceptance command, and the third stop acceptance command are transmitted from the main to the sub upon receiving the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, respectively. The first stop command, the second stop command, and the third stop command are transmitted from the main to the sub, triggered by the first cylinder stop, the second cylinder stop, and the third cylinder stop, respectively. Furthermore, after determining the stop symbol, the all stop command is transmitted from the main to the sub.

  When notifying the push order, the main starts the push order notice before sending the push order instruction number command, for example (see FIG. 23A), and after sending the all-round cylinder stop command, The push order notification is ended before the payout number command is transmitted (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, in the sub, for example, after receiving the push order instruction number command, the push order notification is started until the reel reaches the constant speed rotation (see FIG. 23A), and the third stop acceptance command is issued. After receiving, until the third stop command is received, the push order notification is terminated (see FIG. 22). As described above, in the present embodiment, the push order notification period by the main is set to be longer than the push order notification period by the sub. By starting the push order notification by the main first, even if the push order number transmitted to the sub is not properly transmitted and the push order notification by the sub is not correct, the player is correct by the push order notification by the main. Since the push order can be known, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  It should be noted that the push order notification by the sub is ended in the middle (may not be ended) when the push order by the player is different from the notified push order. That is, when the second stop operation push order is different from the notification push order, after the second stop acceptance command is received, the push order notice is terminated before the second stop command is received, When the pressing order of the one-stop operation is different from the notification pressing order, the pressing order notification ends after receiving the first stop acceptance command and before receiving the first stop command. By ending in the middle, it is also possible to perform an effect to notify that the pressing order is different thereafter. In this embodiment, the notification of the pushing order by the main does not end in the middle even when the pushing order by the player is different from the notified pushing order. But may be terminated. In this case, it is preferable to terminate the push order notification by the main after the push order notification by the sub ends or at the same time. After the push order notification by the main ends, the push order notification by the sub may be ended. Further, the start timing of the push order notification by the main can be arbitrarily set as long as it is after the start lever is operated and until the reel rotates at a constant speed.

  In the present embodiment, the notification of the pressing order by the main is started basically by operating the start lever. For example, the fact that the reel has started rotating and that the reel has reached constant speed rotation has been started. As an opportunity, push order notification can be started. In addition, when the first push order is not notified and the player corrects the first push order, and the second and third push order is notified, the first stop operation has been received. As a trigger, push order notification may be started. In addition, when it is determined in the middle that the pushing order by the player is different from the notified pushing order, the other pushing order is newly determined and switched to the pushing order notice. In addition, when the push order notification by the main is switched, the push order notification by the sub may be switched.

  As an example of changing the start timing of the push order notification, as shown in FIG. 23B, the push order notification by the main and the push order notification by the sub may be started simultaneously. Further, as another example of the change in the push order notification start timing, as shown in FIG. 23C, the sub push order notification may be started before the main push order notification. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the push order instruction number A0 (not notified of the push order) is determined on the main side, the push order instruction number may be uniquely determined on the sub side. . In this case, the push order notification by the main is not performed, and only the push order notification by the sub is executed. it can.

<Circuit configuration of main control board (difference between test specifications and mass production specifications)>
Next, in the case where the slot machine 1 is manufactured as a test specification (specification for receiving a predetermined test) and the case where it is manufactured as a mass production specification (specification for installing a game shop) Differences in the circuit configuration of the main control board will be described. The main IC shown in FIG. 24 is a one-chip microcomputer on which predetermined circuit components (main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, interface circuit, etc.) arranged on the main control board 60 (see FIG. 2) are mounted. , Parallel signal output terminals D0 to D7, serial signal terminals TX0 to TX3 (there are terminals dedicated to output and input / output switching terminals), parallel signal input terminals PI0 to PI7, and the like. (Other various terminals are provided, but only a part is shown).

  The main IC is provided with a plurality of parallel signal output ports (two of which are set as the test output ports PO7 and PO8), and the signal data from each output port is Are output from the terminals D0 to D7. Further, the main IC is provided with a plurality of serial signal output ports (one of which is set as the test output port SO0), and a test signal from the test output port SO0. Are output from the terminal XO0 (in this embodiment, the terminal is dedicated for output, but may be a terminal that can be switched between input and output). The main IC is provided with a plurality of input ports for parallel signals, and signal data is input to the input ports via the terminals PI0 to PI7.

  Further, the test ICs 1 and IC2 and the connectors CN1 and CN2 shown in FIG. 24 are mounted in the case of the test specification, but are not mounted in the case of the mass production specification. In the case of the test specification, the input terminals D0 to D7 of the test ICs 1 and IC2 are connected to the terminals D0 to D7 of the main IC, and the output terminals Q0 to Q7 of the test IC1 and the test IC2 Output terminals Q0 to Q7 are connected to signal input portions 1 to 8 and 9 to 10 of connector CN1, respectively. The signal input unit 2 of the connector CN2 is connected to the terminal TX0 of the main IC. The test signals output from the test output ports PO7 and PO8 (the above-described operation state test signal and winning information test signal) are passed through the test ICs 1 and IC2, the connector CN1, and a predetermined relay device (not shown). And transmitted to a test apparatus (not shown). In addition, the test signal (the symbol stop test signal described above) output from the test output port SO0 is transmitted to the test device via the connector CN2 and the relay device.

  24 is mounted between the power supply voltage VCC (for example, voltage value 12.5V) and the terminal PI0 in the case of test specifications (in the case of mass production specifications). Is a pull-up resistor, and the resistor R2 (for example, resistance value 0 kΩ) is mounted between the reference potential (0V) and the terminal PI0 in the case of mass production specifications (not mounted in the case of test specifications). ) Pull-down resistor. In this way, by changing the mounted resistance (and mounting position) between the test specification and the mass production specification, the potential of the terminal PI0 is high (hereinafter referred to as “H level”) in the case of the test specification. In the case of mass production specifications, it is configured to be at a low level (hereinafter referred to as “L level”). In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the H level or the L level, and based on the determination result, the test specification is at the H level, and the mass production specification is at the L level. It has come to be identified.

  The resistance value of the resistor R2 can be set to an arbitrary value (for example, a resistance value of 4.7 kΩ) as long as the potential of the terminal PI0 becomes L level when mounted. However, when considering that there is a possibility that fraudulent actions such as short-circuiting the power supply VCC and the terminal PI0 may be performed in order to misrecognize that it is a test specification despite being a mass production specification. The resistance value of the resistor R2 is preferably set as low as possible. If the resistance value of the resistor R2 is low, when the power supply VCC and the terminal PI0 are short-circuited, the value of the current flowing in the main IC becomes excessive and the main CPU 61 stops, thereby preventing the game from being illegally performed. Because it becomes possible to do. Contrary to the above, the resistor R1 is mounted between the power supply voltage VCC and the terminal PI0 in the case of mass production specifications, and the resistor R2 is mounted between the reference potential and the terminal PI0 in the case of test specifications. You may do it. In this case, it is sufficient to identify the test specification if the potential of the terminal PI0 is L level and the mass production specification if it is H level.

  In addition, the resistances R1 and R2 to be mounted are not changed between the test specification and the mass production specification, but the resistance is used in either case as in the modified example M1 shown in FIG. R1 and R2 are both mounted, and the switching state of the switch provided between the terminal PI0 and the resistor R2 is switched between the test specification and the mass production specification to identify the specification. You may comprise. Specifically, the switch is open in the case of the test specification (at this time, the terminal PI0 is pulled up and the potential is at the H level), and is closed in the case of the mass production specification (at this time, the terminal PI0 is connected to the terminal PI0). The voltage dividing circuit including the resistors R1 and R2 is connected and the potential is L level). When the potential at the terminal PI0 is H level, the test specification is used, and when the potential is L level, the mass production specification is used. May be identified. Alternatively, on the contrary, the switch is closed in the case of test specifications (at this time, the potential of the terminal PI0 is L level), and is open in the case of mass production specifications (at this time, the potential of the terminal PI0 is H level). If the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the L level, it may be identified as a test specification, and if it is at the H level, it may be identified as a mass production specification. In addition, when adopting such a modified example M1, a configuration that restricts the operation of the switch so that the switch cannot be illegally operated (for example, by providing a thickness at a position corresponding to the switch of the substrate case, It is preferable to provide a switch that prevents the switch from being opened when it is housed in the substrate case.

  In addition, as a circuit configuration connected to the terminal PI0, the mode of the modification example M2 illustrated in FIG. 25B may be employed. In this modified example M2, four resistors R4 (for example, resistance value 13 kΩ), R5 (for example, resistance value 0 kΩ), R6 (for example, resistance value 62 kΩ), R7 (for example, resistance value 39 kΩ) arranged as shown in the figure. Is connected to the terminal PI0. Of these four resistors, resistors R4, R6, and R7 remain mounted regardless of whether they are in the test specification or the mass production specification, and resistor R5 is mounted in the case of the test specification. In the case of (2), it is not mounted (that is, the voltage dividing circuit connected to the terminal PI0 is changed between the test specification and the mass production specification). In this example, the potential of the terminal PI0 is L level in the test specification in which the resistor R5 is mounted, and is H level in the mass production specification in which the resistor R5 is not mounted. If it is a level, it is identified as a test specification. Alternatively, on the contrary, the resistor R5 is not mounted in the case of the test specification, but is mounted in the case of the mass production specification, and when the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the H level, the test specification, L If it is a level, it may be identified as a mass production specification.

In the modification M2, the potential of the terminal PI0 (= potential at the point B in the figure) can be calculated as follows.
・ In case of voltage divider circuit with resistor R5 Potential at point A = ((R5 (R6 + R7) / (R5 + R6 + R7)) / (R4 + ((R5 (R6 + R7)) / (R5 + R6) + R7))) × 12.5 = 0 (V)
Potential at point B = Potential at point A = 0 (V)
・ In the case of voltage divider circuit without resistor R5 Potential at point A = ((R6 + R7) / (R4 + R6 + R7)) × 12.5 ≒ 11 (V)
Potential at point B = (R7 / (R4 + R6 + R7)) x 12.5 ≒ 4.3 (V))

  In addition, as a circuit configuration connected to the terminal PI0, the mode of the modification example M3 illustrated in FIG. 25C may be employed. In the modified example M3, a voltage dividing circuit including three resistors R8 (for example, a resistance value of 1.5 kΩ), R9 (for example, a resistance value of 1 kΩ), and R10 (for example, a resistance value of 0 kΩ) arranged as illustrated is provided. Connect to terminal PI0. Of these three resistors, the resistors R8 and R9 remain mounted regardless of whether they are in the test specification or the mass production specification, and the resistor R10 is mounted in the case of the test specification. (That is, the voltage dividing circuit connected to the terminal PI0 is changed between the test specification and the mass production specification). In this example, the potential of the terminal PI0 is L level in the test specification in which the resistor R10 is mounted, and is H level in the mass production specification in which the resistor R10 is not mounted. If it is a level, it is identified as a test specification, and if it is at an H level, it is identified as a mass production specification. Alternatively, on the contrary, the resistor R10 is not mounted in the case of the test specification, but is mounted in the case of the mass production specification, and when the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the H level, If it is a level, it may be identified as a mass production specification.

In the modification M3, the potential of the terminal PI0 (= potential at the point C in the figure) can be calculated as follows.
・ In the case of voltage divider circuit with resistor R10 Potential at point C = ((R9 ・ R10) / (R9 + R10)) / (R8 + (R9 ・ R10) / (R9 + R10))) × 12.5 = 0 ( V)
・ In the case of voltage divider circuit without resistor R10 Potential at point C = (R9 / (R8 + R9)) x 12.5 = 5 (V)

  In the case of a configuration in which a pull-up resistor or a pull-down resistor is connected to the terminal PI0, it is necessary to replace the resistor mounted on the substrate depending on whether it is a test specification or a mass production specification. On the other hand, in the modified examples M2 and M3, it is only necessary not to mount some of the plurality of resistors to be mounted in the test specification, so that the manufacturing process is simplified. There is an advantage of obtaining. Of course, in the case of the modified examples M2 and M3, the resistor mounted on the board is replaced depending on whether it is a test specification or a mass production specification, thereby changing the voltage dividing circuit connected to the terminal PI0. It may be. Moreover, the thing of arbitrary aspects can be employ | adopted about the specific structure of a voltage dividing circuit.

<Information storage area>
Next, the information storage area in the main control means of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the ROM (ROM 62 in FIG. 2), a first PRG area and a second PRG area are set (PRG is an abbreviation of a program). The first PRG area stores a control program (such as a role determination process and a reel control program) related to the progress of a normal game, and data (such as a role lottery table and a symbol stop table) used in the control program. It is an area. The second PRG area is a control program for preventing fraud, a test control program (such as a program for transmitting a test signal), and data used in the control program (such as a stop acceptance designation table described later). Is an area in which is stored. Of course, there is no problem with storing these in the first PRG area even if they are a control program for preventing fraud and a control program for testing.

  On the other hand, a first PRG area corresponding area and a second PRG area corresponding area are set in the RAM (RAM 63 in FIG. 2). The first PRG area corresponding area is a storage area mainly used by the control program stored in the first PRG area, and the second PRG area corresponding area is mainly used by the control program stored in the second PRG area. Storage area. The control program stored in the first PRG area is allowed to write (including change) and read data to the first PRG area corresponding area, but to write data to the second PRG area corresponding area. Is not allowed and only reading is allowed. Similarly, in the control program stored in the second PRG area, data writing and reading are both permitted to the second PRG area corresponding area, but data writing is permitted to the first PRG area corresponding area. Only reading is permitted. Note that when the processing by the control program stored in the first PRG area is shifted to the processing by the control program stored in the second PRG area, interrupts are prohibited (stored in the first PRG area within the timer interrupt process). The information stored in each register before the transition is protected (saved) except for the transition to the process by the control program stored in the second PRG area). Further, when returning from the processing by the control program stored in the second PRG area to the processing by the control program stored in the first PRG area, an interrupt is permitted (stored in the second PRG area in the timer interrupt process). The information of each protected register is restored, except when the process by the control program shifts to the process by the control program stored in the first PRG area.

  In the present embodiment, each storage area (address area) shown in FIG. 27 is set in the first PRG area corresponding area. The operation state flag storage area (address number “F01CH” in the RAM (“H” at the end is a hexadecimal number) in the RAM) shown in FIG. It is set as an area for storing information on whether or not it is a re-game operating state, whether or not it is a BB operating state, and whether or not it is an RB operating state. Bit 0 of this operation state flag storage area corresponds to the replay operation state flag described above. Then, storing the information “1” in bit 0 corresponds to setting (ON) the above-mentioned re-game operation state flag, and storing the information “0” stores the re-game operation state flag. This corresponds to clearing (OFF). Further, bit 3 of the operation state flag storage area corresponds to the above-described BB operation state flag. Storing information “1” in bit 3 corresponds to setting (ON) the BB operating state flag described above, and storing “0” information clears the BB operating state flag ( OFF). Further, bit 4 of the operation state flag storage area corresponds to the RB operation state flag described above. Storing information “1” in bit 4 corresponds to setting (ON) the RB operation state flag described above, and storing information “0” clears the RB operation state flag ( OFF). In this embodiment, bits 7 to 5, 2, and 1 of the operation state flag storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state where information of “0” is stored (cleared state).

  The operation symbol display flag storage area (address number “F043H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27B corresponds to the above-described operation symbol display flag, and whether or not the re-game operation symbol is displayed. Or, it is set as an area for storing information on whether or not the BB operation symbol is displayed. Bit 0 of the operation symbol display flag storage area corresponds to the above-described re-game operation symbol display flag. Storing the information “1” in bit 0 corresponds to setting (ON) the re-game operation symbol display flag, and storing the information “0” stores the re-game operation symbol display flag. This corresponds to clearing (OFF). Further, bit 3 of the operation symbol display flag storage area corresponds to the BB operation symbol display flag described above. Storing information “1” in bit 3 corresponds to setting (ON) the BB operation symbol display flag, and storing “0” information clears the BB operation symbol display flag ( OFF). In the present embodiment, bits 7 to 4, 2, and 1 of the operation state flag storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state where information of “0” is stored (cleared state).

  The winning / RP combination determination result number storage area (address number “F048H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27C is an area in which the information on the winning / RP combination determination result number is stored. . Bits 5 to 0 of the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area correspond to the above-mentioned winning / RP combination determination result flag. Then, in these bits 5 to 0, numerical data of the winning / RP winning combination decision result number selected by the winning decision process (binary numeric data. For example, if the winning decision result number is 17, “17” = “010001B ("B" means binary number)) is equivalent to setting (ON) the winning / RP combination determination result number flag, and storing information of "0" in all bits 5 to 0 Is equivalent to clearing (OFF) the winning / RP combination determination result number flag. In the present embodiment, the bits 7 and 6 of the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area are unused areas, and information “0” is always stored (cleared).

  27D is an area in which the information on the combination determination result number of the above-mentioned combination is stored. In the combination combination determination result number storage area (address number “F049H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. Bit 0 of the character combination determination result number storage area corresponds to the aforementioned character combination determination result flag. In addition, storing the information “1” in bit 0 corresponds to setting (ON) the winning combination determining result number flag, and storing the information “0” is the winning combination determining result. This corresponds to clearing (OFF) the number flag. In the present embodiment, bits 7 to 1 of the accessory combination determination result number storage area are unused areas, and information “0” is always stored (cleared state).

  The push order instruction number storage area (address number “F0B8H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27E is an area for storing information of the selected push order instruction numbers A0 to A9. In this push order instruction number storage area, the numerical data of the push order designation numbers A0 to A9 (binary numeric data. For example, “3” = “0011B” for the push order designation number A3. In the case of the push order instruction number A6, storing “6” = “0110B”) corresponds to storing the push order instruction number information. In the case of the push order instruction number A0, the numerical data “0” = “0000B” is stored in bits 3 to 0, which is the same as the state in which bits 3 to 0 are cleared. Since the numerical data stored in the push order instruction number storage area is cleared at the end of the game, in this embodiment, when the push order instruction number A0 is selected (push order instruction numbers A1 to A9). Is not selected), the process of storing the numerical data “0” is not performed (may be performed). In this embodiment, bits 7 to 4 of the push order instruction number storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state where information of “0” is stored (cleared state).

  Although not particularly illustrated, in order to correspond to the case where the push order instruction numbers A7 to A9 are selected, in addition to the push order instruction number storage area, information on the push order instruction numbers A1 to A6 is stored. A storage area (hereinafter referred to as a “pressing order application determination storage area”) is set. The push order instruction numbers A7 to A9 are selected for the above-described push order hit game that is performed when any of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected by the combination determination process when the game mode 3 is set. If any of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected regardless of whether or not the winning order winning game is won, any of the pressing order instruction numbers A1 to A6 is selected. Has been selected first. Therefore, two pushes, a normal push order instruction number (any one of push order instruction numbers A1 to A6) and a push order instruction number for a push order hitting game (any one of push order instruction numbers A7 to A9). A state in which a sequential instruction number is selected occurs.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the normal push order instruction number (any one of A1 to A6) is configured to be stored not only in the push order instruction number storage area described above but also in the push order determination determination storage area. When a push order instruction number (any one of A7 to A9) for the push order application game is selected, information on the normal push order instruction number stored in the push order instruction number storage area before that is selected. The information on the push order instruction number for the push order hit game is rewritten, while the information on the normal push order instruction number stored in the push order hit judgment storage area is held as it is. The information of the push order instruction number stored in the push order instruction number storage area is used when notifying the push order (in particular, when the push order instruction number for the push order hitting game is notified of the push order in the push order hitting game) The information of the push order instruction number stored in the push order judgment storage area is used when judging whether or not the push order game is correct. As information storage timing, when storing the information of the normal pressing order instruction number in the pressing order instruction number storage area, the same information is also stored in the pressing order determination storage area. Can do. On the other hand, when a normal push order instruction number is selected, the information is stored only in the push order instruction number storage area, and when a push order instruction number for a push order hitting game is selected, the push order instruction number is stored. The information on the normal push order instruction number stored in the storage area is moved to the push order determination storage area, and the push order instruction number information for the push order application game is stored in the push order instruction number storage area. May be.

  The winning information output period timer storage area (address number “F030H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27 (F) is stored in the winning information test signal (actual winning information when the slot machine 1 has the test specifications). The timer value of a timer (referred to as “winning information output period timer”) set to identify whether or not it is a period for outputting information (in the state where information is set) (the above-mentioned winning information output period) An area where information is stored. In this winning information output period timer storage area, bits 4 to 0 store timer value (binary value) information of the winning information output period timer (information of “25” when the timer is set). Each time the loading process is executed, information of values “24” to “0” obtained by sequentially subtracting “1” is stored. In this embodiment, bits 7 to 5 in the winning information output period timer storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state where information of “0” is stored (cleared state). The winning information output period corresponds to a period (= 2,235 ms × 24 = 53.64 ms) in which a timer interrupt process described later is executed 24 times.

  When the slot machine 1 has a test specification, the information on the winning / RP combination determination result number stored in the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area is the information on the winning / RP combination determination result number in the test apparatus. Information of an identifier for identifying the presence (appropriately referred to as “winner / RP identifier”) is added and configured as the above-mentioned winning / RP winning information, and the winning information test is performed from the aforementioned test output port PO7. A signal is output to the test apparatus. Specifically, the winning / RP winning information is composed of 8-bit data, the upper 2 bits are the data of the winning / RP identifier, and the lower 6 bits are the data of the winning / RP winning decision result number. The When winning / RP winning information is output as a winning information test signal, as shown in FIG. 28A, each bit D7 to D0 of the test output port PO7 (terminal D7 of the main IC shown in FIG. 24). To D0, bits D5 to D0 include data of winning / RP combination determination result numbers ("0") stored in bits 5 to 0 of the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area. To any one of "51"), and the winning D / RP identifier data ("0" in bit D7 and "1" in bit D6) is set in bits D7 and D6. .

  Similarly, the information on the character combination determination result number stored in the character combination determination result number storage area is an identifier for appropriately identifying the test apparatus as information on the character combination determination result number (as appropriate). Information (referred to as an “object identifier”) is added and configured as the above-mentioned winning item winning information, and is output from the test output port PO7 to the testing device as the winning information test signal. Specifically, the winning combination winning information is composed of 8-bit data, and the upper 2 bits are the identifier data of the above-mentioned accessory and the lower 6 bits are the data of the winning combination determination result number. When the winning item winning information is output as the winning information test signal, as shown in FIG. 28B, among the bits D7 to D0 of the test output port PO7, the bits D5 to D0 are The data of bits 5 to 0 in the combination character determination result number storage area is set (bit D0 is data of the combination character determination result number (“1” or “0”), and bits D5 to D1 are “0”. Data is set), and in the bits D7 and D6, data of the identifier of the accessory (data “1” in the bit D7 and data “0” in the bit D6) is set.

  Further, when the slot machine 1 is in the test specification, whether or not it is a re-game operation state stored in the operation state flag storage area (whether the above-mentioned re-game operation state flag is ON or OFF), a BB operation state Information (whether the above-mentioned BB operation state flag is ON or OFF) and whether it is in the RB operation state (whether the above-mentioned RB operation state flag is ON or OFF) Information ”) is output from the test output port PO8 described above to the test apparatus as the operation state test signal. Specifically, the operation state flag information is composed of 8-bit data, and the lowest bit is ON / OFF data (“1” or “0”) of the replay operation state flag. The fourth bit is the ON / OFF data (“1” or “0”) of the BB operation state flag, and the fifth bit is the ON / OFF data (“1” or “0”) of the RB operation state flag. ). When the operation state flag information is output as the operation state test signal, as shown in FIG. 28C, the bits of the operation state flag storage area are assigned to the bits D7 to D0 of the test output port PO8. 7 to 0 data is set (bit D4 is ON / OFF data of the RB operation state flag, bit D3 is ON / OFF data of the BB operation state flag, and bit D0 is a re-game operation state flag. ON / OFF data, “0” data is set in bits D7 to D5, D2, and D1).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the information of the winning / RP combination determination result number stored in the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area is added with the information of the winning / RP identifier to add the winning / RP winning information. It is configured and output to the testing device as a winning information test signal from the test output port PO7 (the same applies to the winning feature winning information), but the area for storing the winning / RP winning information and the winning feature winning information Is not provided. This is effective in that an increase in the storage area to be used can be suppressed when the storage capacity of the RAM is small. On the other hand, as a modified example, an area for storing winning / RP winning information and bonus winning information may be provided in the RAM. FIG. 29A shows an example in which a winning / RP winning information storage area (address number “F04CH” in RAM) for storing winning / RP winning information is set in the RAM, FIG. 29B. Shows an example in which an accessory winning information storage area (address number “F04DH” in the RAM) for storing the winning feature winning information is set in the RAM.

  In the present embodiment, the area is set when the stop acceptance designation table T1 shown in FIG. 30A and the stop acceptance designation table T2 shown in FIG. 30B are stored in the second PRG area of the ROM. Has been. As shown in FIG. 30, the stop acceptance designation table T1 includes 24 consecutive address areas (address numbers “*** 00H” to “** 27H” (* in “ROM” in the ROM) in the second PRG area of the ROM. The stop acceptance designation table T2 is stored in four address areas (address number “** in ROM” in the second PRG area of the ROM). 30H "to" ** 33H ").

  The stop acceptance designation table T1 outputs the above-described symbol stop test signal (signal for transmitting information on the optimal pressing order and the pressing position) to the test apparatus in a state that is not in the BB operating state (when the BB is not operating). This is a table to be referred to. In the stop acceptance designation table T1, the four storage areas from the address numbers “** 00H” to “** 03H” include the optimum push order and push position corresponding to the push order instruction number A0 (push order unknown). Information is stored. Specifically, in the storage area of the address number “** 00H”, “0” data corresponding to the numerical value of the push order instruction number A0 (optimum push order) is stored, and the address number “** 01H” is stored. In the storage area, data of the left reel stop reception position (optimum pressing position on the left reel) is stored. Similarly, in the storage area of the address number “** 02H”, data of the middle reel stop reception position (optimum pressing position in the middle reel) is stored, and in the storage area of the address number “** 03H”, the right reel stop is stored. Data on the reception position (optimum pressing position on the right reel) is stored. Note that the data on the left reel stop reception position is data of a symbol number (referred to as “3” in the present embodiment) on the left reel. This is stopped when the symbol of symbol number 3 on the left reel is at a predetermined position (the upper position in the display window W) when the push order instruction number A0 is selected while the BB is not operating. This means that it is optimal to perform the operation (the probability that a game will be established is the highest) (the same applies to the data on the middle reel stop reception position and the data on the right reel stop reception position).

  In addition, in the four storage areas (address numbers “** 04H” to “** 07H”) subsequent to the four storage areas corresponding to the push order instruction number A0, the push order instruction number A1 (“left middle right”) Is stored in the four storage areas (address numbers “*** 08H” to “** 0BH”) that follow the pressing order instruction number A2 (“left and right middle”). In the stop acceptance designation table T1, information on the optimum pushing order and pushing position corresponding to each of the pushing order instruction numbers A0 to A9 is stored. It is stored in each of the four consecutive storage areas. Note that the stored data “127” in the stop acceptance designation table T1 means that the optimum pressing position is an arbitrary position (there is no difference in advantage and disadvantage depending on the pressing position).

  On the other hand, the stop acceptance designation table T2 is a table that is referred to in order to output the symbol stop test signal to the test apparatus during the BB operation. In the stop acceptance designation table T2, the four storage areas from the address numbers “** 30H” to “** 33H” include the optimum push order and push position corresponding to the push order instruction number A0 (push order unknown). Information is stored. Specifically, the storage area of the address number “** 30H” stores “0” data corresponding to the numerical value of the push order instruction number A0, and the address numbers “** 31H” to “** 33H”. In the storage area up to and including the data of the left reel stop reception position, the middle reel stop reception position, and the right reel stop reception position (all are “127”).

<Test signal output timing>
Next, the output timing of the above test signal will be described. As briefly described above, the winning information test signal is subjected to a timer interrupt process in a timer interrupt process described later that is executed every predetermined time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). The winning information test signal in a state where the actual winning information is set is output only during the above-described winning information output period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), in the winning combination information, the above-mentioned winning information output period timer is set, and the timer value is only the period from “24” to “13”. In each timer interrupt process executed in step S2, the timer output port PO7 is set and output to the test apparatus as a winning information test signal 12 times in total. On the other hand, the winning / RP winning information is set in the test output port PO7 in each timer interrupt process executed during the period from the timer value of the winning information output period timer from “12” to “1”. Similarly, a total of 12 times, the winning information test signal is output to the test apparatus. In other words, the winning information output period is a period from “24” to “1” as the winning information output period, and in other periods, the winning information in which no actual winning information is set. A test signal (eg, “00000000B” signal) is output.

  Note that the winning information output period timer must be secured at the minimum in the reel rotation start preparation process described later until the reel starts rotating in the next game after the reel starts rotating in one game. It is set after confirming that the time (for example, 4.1 seconds) that must be passed has passed. Therefore, in one winning information output period, the winning information in which the winning information is set in the next winning information output period from the time when the winning information test signal in which the winning information is set is first output. The time until the test signal is first output is not less than the minimum game time. Therefore, in the test apparatus, it is possible to confirm that the minimum game time is secured by checking when the winning information test signal in which the winning item winning information is set is output. Become. Therefore, it is not necessary to output another signal indicating that the minimum game time is secured to the test apparatus (this can reduce the burden of control processing).

  Also, the operating state test signal is output every time the timer interrupt processing is executed, like the winning information test signal, but the re-game operating state flag set in the operating state test signal, BB The operation state flag and the RB operation state flag are turned ON / OFF at the following timing. That is, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the re-game operation state flag is set from OFF to ON in a game start process described later in the game after the re-game operation symbol is displayed, and when the game ends (described later). It is turned OFF in the game end check process. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31C, the BB operation state flag is set from OFF to ON in the game start process in the game after the BB operation symbol is displayed, and at the same time, the RB operation state flag is changed from OFF to ON. Is set.

  The BB operation state flag once set to ON is continuously turned ON until the BB game end condition (payout of over 450 game medals) is satisfied. On the other hand, after the RB operation state flag is set to ON together with the BB operation state flag, the RB operation state flag is once switched to OFF and set to ON again every two games (every time the RB game end condition is satisfied). . The waiting time (freeze) at the end of the RB operation described above is set between the time when the RB operation state flag is switched to OFF and the time when the RB operation state flag is set to ON again. In the embodiment, it is set as a period (= 2.235 ms × 5≈11 ms) in which a timer interrupt process described later is executed five times. That is, within the waiting time at the end of the RB operation, the BB operation state flag is set to ON and the RB operation state flag is set to OFF. In each timer interrupt process executed during that time, the operation state flag as described above is set. The operating state test signal carrying information is output from the test output port PO8 five times in total. On the other hand, the game progress control process described later is not executed during this time, and no game operation is accepted.

  Note that the waiting time at the end of the RB operation is for allowing the test apparatus to identify that the RB game is operating continuously (intermittently) while the BB operation is temporarily inactive during the BB operation. Can be set to However, the standby time at the end of the RB operation is set even in the case of the mass production specification (may not be set in the case of the mass production specification), and the freeze during the standby time at the end of the RB operation is It is different from the general freeze that is set to let the player recognize it in order to obtain an effect on the production, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable (cannot be recognized as being frozen). It is preferable to set it (for example, about 2.235 × 2 to 25≈4.5 to 56 ms). The above-mentioned standby time at the end of RB operation (≈11 ms) is a short time that the player does not feel uncomfortable in the mass production specification, and in the test specification, the test apparatus correctly recognizes the OFF period of the RB operation state flag. It is set as sufficient time to get.

  The symbol stop test signal is output in a symbol stop test signal output process described later. In the present embodiment, this symbol stop test signal output processing is performed after receiving a start lever operation (actually, after receiving a signal (game start command signal) transmitted from the test device indicating that the start lever has been operated). ), Which is performed before execution of processing for determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed (performed in the reel rotation start preparation processing described later). This has the following advantages. That is, in a test such as a type test, the symbol stop test signal may be required to be output within a predetermined time after receiving the game start command signal, but the predetermined time is set shorter than the minimum game time. (For example, 2 seconds). On the other hand, in the test, when the game is played in the shortest time, the time from receiving the game start command signal to receiving the next game start command signal is, for example, about 1 second, which is considerably shorter than the minimum game time there is a possibility. In that case, if the symbol stop test signal output process is executed after the process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, there is a possibility that the request for the output timing of the symbol stop test signal may not be met. On the other hand, by performing it before the process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, it is possible to sufficiently satisfy such a request. In addition, while it is necessary to execute various control processes after the process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, in the test, the next game start command is received after the game start command signal is received. Since the time until the signal is received becomes short, a time margin is generated after the game start command signal is received and before the minimum game time elapses. For this reason, even if the symbol stop test signal output process is performed before the process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, the processing load can be reduced.

[Main control processing]
Hereinafter, main control processing performed in the above-described slot machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. In the following, the test specification determination preparation process, the game progress control process, and the timer interrupt process among the control processes performed in the main control unit 100 will be described first with reference to FIGS. Next, among the various control processes performed in the sub-main control unit 200A, in particular, the program start process, the sub-main loop process, and the power-off process will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Test specification judgment preparation process>
The test specification determination preparation process is a process performed when the power is turned on. First, as shown in FIG. 32A, input port reading is performed (step R11). In this input port reading, in particular, each potential level of the above-described terminals PI0 to PI7 is read. Next, it is determined whether or not the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level (step R12). The test level is a level (H level or L level) set as the potential level of the terminal PI0 when the slot machine 1 is in the test specification. That is, in the test specification, if the terminal PI0 is set to H level, the test level is H level. Conversely, if the terminal PI0 is set to L level in the test specification, the test level is That is the L level. In the determination of step R12, if the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level, the test flag (a flag for identifying whether or not the potential of the terminal PI0 at power-on is at the test level) is turned on. (Step R13) and return. If the test level is not reached, the test flag is not set and the process returns.

  Note that, as in the modification example J1 shown in FIG. 32B, in the test specification determination preparation process, the process including the process of checking the potential level of the terminal PI0 may not be performed. Further, unlike the modified example J2 shown in FIG. 32C, the in-test flag is not set, and the potential level (H level or L level) of the terminal PI0 is stored in a predetermined storage area such as a RAM (RAM 63). (Step R14A).

<Game progress control processing>
The game progress control process described below is a basic process that is repeatedly executed during a game. As shown in FIG. 33, first, a game start process is performed (step S1). In this game start process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, information on a symbol combination display flag is acquired (step S31). Specifically, the data value (data value of the operation symbol display flag) stored in the operation symbol display flag storage area (see FIG. 27B) is stored in the A register (the register included in the main CPU 61. The following registers) The same processing is performed for the above. Next, it is determined whether or not a BB action symbol is displayed in the previous game (step S32). Here, if the BB action symbol is displayed, data of the number of game medals that can be acquired ("450") at the time of BB action (at the start of action) is stored in a predetermined storage area (step S33), and the process goes to step S34. If the BB action symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S34 without performing the process in step S33.

In this step S34, data on the operating state flag is generated. Specifically, the following processes (1) to (5) are performed.
(1) Store the address data in the operating state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) in the HL register. Specifically, since the address of the operation symbol display flag storage area is “F01CH”, the H register value = “F0H” and the L register value = “1CH”.
(2) The data value stored in the A register (= data value of the operation symbol display flag) and the data value stored in the storage area of the address stored in the HL register (= operating state flag storage area) = Data value of the operating state flag) and the result of the operation is stored in the A register.
(3) The data value stored in the A register (= the data value obtained by the OR operation) is stored in the C register.
(4) The data value (= BB) of the data value stored in the A register (= the data value obtained by the OR operation) and the data value of the operation symbol display flag (= 8-bit data value) An AND operation is performed on an 8-bit data value (= “00001000B”) in which the data value corresponding to the operation symbol display flag) is set to “1” and the data value of other bits is set to “0”, and the calculation result is A Store in register.
(5) An operation for shifting the data value stored in the A register (= the data value obtained by the AND operation) to the left by 1 bit is performed, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

  After the process of step S34, the operating state flag is updated (step S35). Specifically, after the process of step S34 (5), the data value stored in the A register and the data value stored in the C register are ORed and stored in the A register. . Next, the updated operating state flag is stored (step S36). Specifically, a process of storing the data value stored in the A register in the storage area (= operation state flag storage area) of the address stored in the HL register is performed. As a result, the information on the operating state flag so far is replaced with the updated information on the operating state flag.

As a specific example of the above processes (2) to (5) in step S34 and the processes in steps S35 and S36, when a BB action symbol is displayed in the previous game (hereinafter referred to as "specific example 1"), When the BB operation symbol is already displayed and the BB and RB are operating (hereinafter referred to as “specific example 2”), when the BB operation symbol is already displayed and the BB operation is being performed but the RB is not operating ( (Hereinafter referred to as “specific example 3”) how the value of each register changes will be described.
[Specific Example 1]
(Step S34)
(2) A register value: “00001000B”
Data value at address stored in HL register: “00000000B”
A register value after OR operation: “00001000B”
(3) A register value: “00001000B”
C register value: “00001000B”
(4) A register value: “00001000B”
Data value when bit 3 is “1” and other bits are “0”: “00001000B”
A register value after AND operation: “00001000B”
(5) A register value (before left shift): “00001000B”
A register value (after left shift): “00010000B”
(Step S35)
A register value: “00010000B”
C register value: “00001000B”
A register value (after OR operation): “00011000B”
(Step S36)
Data value at address stored in HL register: “00011000B”
[Specific Example 2]
(Step S34)
(2) A register value: “00000000B”
Data value at address stored in HL register: “00011000B”
A register value after OR operation: “00011000B”
(3) A register value: “00011000B”
C register value: “00011000B”
(4) A register value: “00011000B”
Data value when bit 3 is “1” and other bits are “0”: “00001000B”
A register value after AND operation: “00001000B”
(5) A register value (before left shift): “00001000B”
A register value (after left shift): “00010000B”
(Step S35)
A register value: “00010000B”
C register value: “00011000B”
A register value (after OR operation): “00011000B”
(Step S36)
Data value at address stored in HL register: “00011000B”
[Specific Example 3]
(Step S34)
(2) A register value: “00000000B”
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: “00001000B”
A register value after OR operation: “00001000B”
(3) A register value: “00001000B”
C register value: “00001000B”
(4) A register value: “00001000B”
Data value when bit 3 is “1” and other bits are “0”: “00001000B”
A register value after AND operation: “00001000B”
(5) A register value (before left shift): “00001000B”
A register value (after left shift): “00010000B”
(Step S35)
A register value: “00010000B”
C register value: “00001000B”
A register value (after OR operation): “00011000B”
(Step S36)
Data value at address stored in HL register: “00011000B”

  Next, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has been started (step S37). Specifically, the XOR operation is performed on the data value stored in the A register and the data value stored in the C register, and a zero flag (set to a specific bit in the F register, the result of the operation is “0”). If it is, “1” data is stored), but it is determined whether or not it is “1”. Here, if the zero flag ≠ “1”, it is determined that the RB operation has started, and the process proceeds to step S38. If the zero flag = “1”, the process returns to step S38 without proceeding. In this step S38, information on the possible number of games (2 times) and the possible number of winning times (2 times) at the time of RB operation is stored. Specifically, data “2” is stored in the RB game possible number counter and the RB winning possibility number counter set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63, respectively.

  With the return from the game start process, the process proceeds to step S2 in FIG. 33 and game medal management is performed. Specifically, when a game medal is inserted (care) or a bet switch is operated by a player, the number of bets and credits (storage) is managed, and when the clearing switch is operated Then, a clearing process for paying out the betted game medals and the stored game medals is performed. If the game is in the re-game operation state, automatic bet processing is performed to set the game medals as many as the number of bets in the previous game.

  After performing the game medal management, the process proceeds to step S3. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the bet number matches the specified number and the operation of the start lever has been accepted. If the determination here is good, the process proceeds to step S4, and if not, the process returns to step S2. In step S4, the blocker is turned OFF and the process proceeds to step S5.

  In this step S5, a combination determining process is performed. Specifically, first, a random number latch for selecting one random number from a random number sequence generated by the random number generator 66 or the like is performed. Next, the latched random number (hereinafter referred to as “latch random number” as appropriate) is read, and one combination determination result number is selected based on the read latch random number and the combination lottery table. Next, information on the selected winning combination determination result number is stored in the above-described winning / RP winning combination determination result number storage area or combination winning combination determination result number storage area.

  After performing the combination determining process, it is determined which of the game modes 0 to 7 is set (step S6). Then, according to the set game mode, game mode 0 (lever) processing (step S7), game mode 1 (lever) processing (step S8), game mode 2 (lever) processing (step S9), game mode 3 (lever) processing (step S10), gaming mode 4 (lever) processing (step S11), gaming mode 5 (lever) processing (step S12), gaming mode 6 (lever) processing (step S13), gaming mode 7 ( Lever) process (step S14) is performed.

  In the game mode 0 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 35A, first, it is determined whether or not any of the combination determination result numbers 15 to 22 and 48 to 50 is selected in the combination determination process. Determination is made (step S41). Here, if any combination determination result number is selected, the above-described AT lottery is performed (step S42), and it is determined whether or not the AT is won (step S43). Here, if the AT is won, "1" is added to the AT stock number (step S44). Specifically, a process of incrementing the value of the AT stock number counter (initial value “0”) set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 by “+1” is performed. And the above-mentioned precursor G number lottery is performed (step S45), and it returns. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41 that the combination determination result numbers 15 to 22 and 48 to 50 are not selected, the process returns to step S42 to S45, and the determination in step S43 returns AT. If not won, the process returns to step S44 or S45.

  In the game mode 1 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 35B, the process returns without performing any particular process. In the game mode 2 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 35C, a push order instruction number setting process is performed (step S51). In this push order instruction number setting process, as shown in FIG. 35 (D), it is determined which combination determination result number (winning / RP combination determination result number) has been selected (step S52). If any of the winning combination determination result numbers 2, 7, 12, 23, 29, 35, 42 is selected, the push order instruction number A1 is selected (step S53), and the winning combination determination result numbers 3, 8, If any of 24, 30, 36, 43 has been selected, the push order instruction number A2 is selected (step S54), and any of the combination determination result numbers 4, 9, 13, 25, 31, 37, 44 is selected. Is selected, the push order instruction number A3 is selected (step S55). Similarly, if any of the combination determination result numbers 5, 10, 26, 32, 38, 45 is selected, the push order instruction number A4 is selected (step S56), and combination determination result numbers 6, 11, 27 are selected. , 33, 39, 46 are selected, the push order instruction number A5 is selected (step S57), and if any of the hand determination result numbers 28, 34, 40, 47 is selected. A push order instruction number A6 is selected (step S58). Although not shown, the information on the selected push order instruction number is stored in the above-described push order instruction number storage area (see FIG. 27E), and the process returns. If a combination determination result number other than the above is selected, the process returns without selecting any push order instruction number. This is the case when the push order instruction number A0 is selected and the information is stored. This is the same (the information on the push order instruction number is cleared at the end of the game, but the cleared state is the same as the state where the information on the push order instruction number A0 (“00000000B”) is stored).

  In the game mode 3 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36A, first, the push order instruction number setting process is performed (step S61). Next, it is determined whether or not any of the winning combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected (step S62), and if it is selected, the above-mentioned push order hitting game lottery is performed (step S63), It is then determined whether or not a game lottery has been won (step S64). Here, when winning, it is determined which of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected (step S65), and combination determination result number 23 or 24 is selected Selects the push order instruction number A7 (step S66), and if the combination determination result number 25 or 26 is selected, selects the push order instruction number A8 (step S67) and selects the combination determination result number 27 or 28. If so, push order instruction number A9 is selected, and the process proceeds to step S69. On the other hand, if the winning combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 are not selected in the determination of step S62, the process proceeds directly to step S69. If the determination in step S64 does not win the push order game lottery. From there, the process proceeds directly to step S69.

  As described above, in the game mode 3 (lever) process, when any of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected by the combination determination process, the normal push order instruction number (any one of A1 to A6) is displayed. In addition to being selected, if the winning order drawing game lottery is won, a pressing order instruction number (any one of A7 to A9) for the pressing order game is also selected. As described above, the push order instruction number for the push order hit game is used for notification of the push order in the push order hit game, and the normal push order instruction number is used to determine whether or not the push order hit game is correct. Used for

  In step S69, it is determined whether or not any of the winning combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 is selected in the winning combination determination process. Here, if any combination determination result number is selected, the above-described AT lottery is performed (step S70), and it is determined whether or not the AT is won (step S71). Here, if the AT is won, “1” is added to the AT stock number (step S72), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the winning combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 are not selected in the determination of step S69, the process returns without performing the processes of steps S70 to S72, and if the AT is not selected in the determination of step S71. The process returns without performing the process of step S72. In addition, the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 that become the trigger for executing the AT lottery are selected only in the RT3 state. For this reason, it is set to game mode 3 but not set to RT3 (for example, if the player does not follow the push order navigation when in game mode 2, the game mode transitions to a game state other than RT3 and is set to game mode 3) )), The AT lottery is not performed, and the AT stock number is not added.

  In the game mode 4 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36B, the process returns without performing any particular process. In the game mode 5 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36C, AT lottery is performed (step S81), and it is determined whether or not the AT is won (step S82). Here, if the AT is won, “1” is added to the AT stock number (step S83), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the AT is not won, the process returns without performing step S83. In the game mode 6 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36D, the process returns without performing any particular process. In the game mode 7 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36 (E), an AT lottery is performed (step S91), and it is determined whether or not the AT is won (step S92). Here, if the AT is won, “1” is added to the AT stock number (step S93), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the AT is not won, the process returns without performing step S93. As described above, when the game modes 5 and 7 are set, every game AT lottery is performed.

  Returning from the game mode 0 (lever) process to the game mode 7 (lever) process described above, the process proceeds to step S15 in FIG. 33, and a push order instruction display process is performed. Specifically, the WIN lamp indicates the push order (see FIG. 16) corresponding to the push order instruction number (any one of A1 to A9) selected in the game mode 2 (lever) process or the game mode 3 (lever) process. The process of displaying on 46j (the process of setting the data of the push order instruction number in the A register and the process of setting the data of the push order instruction number set in the A register to the predetermined output port) is performed. When none of the push order instruction numbers A1 to A9 is selected, the push order is not notified by the WIN lamp 46j. Further, in the game modes other than the game modes 2 and 3, the push order instruction number is not selected, and the push order is not notified by the WIN lamp 46j.

  After performing the push order instruction display process, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 has the test specification (step S16). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the above-described in-test flag is set to ON. If it is set to ON, it is determined to be a test specification, and if it is not set to ON, it is determined to be a mass production specification. judge. In addition to this, there are other methods for determining whether or not the test specification is used (for example, in the reel rotation start preparation process shown in FIGS. Can be employed to determine whether or not to set. If it is determined in step S16 that the test specification is satisfied, interruption (for example, execution of a timer interrupt process described later) is prohibited (step S17), and the symbol stop test signal output process described below is performed (step S18). .

  This symbol stop test signal output process is executed by the control program stored in the second PRG region (see FIG. 26) described above. First, as shown in FIG. (Step S1801). Specifically, the stack pointer is saved in the first PRG area, the stack pointer is set in the second PRG area, and the data stored in each register is saved. Next, the above-described stop acceptance designation table T2 (see FIG. 30B) is set (step S1802). Specifically, the start address (“** 30H”) of the stop acceptance designation table T2 is set in the HL register. Then, it is determined whether the BB is operating (step S1803). Specifically, the operation state flag data stored in the operation state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) is set in the A register, and the value set in the A register is shifted right by 1 bit. To do. For example, when the BB and RB are operating, the A register value is initially “00011000B”, and after the right shift is “00001100B” (at this time, zero flag = “0”). Further, it is determined whether or not the sero flag is “1”. When “1”, it is determined that the BB is not operating, and when “0” is determined that the BB is operating. Note that no right shift is performed, and it is determined whether or not the value of bit 3 of the A register value is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined that the BB is operating. It may be determined that the BB is not operating.

  If it is determined in step S1803 that the BB operation is not in progress, the process advances to step S1804 to set the above-described stop acceptance designation table T1 (see FIG. 30A). Specifically, the start address (“** 00H”) of the stop acceptance designation table T1 is set in the HL register (when it is determined that the BB is not operating, the stop acceptance designation table T2 remains set. ). Then, a designated table address corresponding to the previously selected push order instruction number is set (step S1805). Specifically, the numerical value of the push order instruction number (for example, “3” for A3, “6” for A6, and a push order instruction when the stop acceptance designation table T2 is set (when BB is operating). The data of “0” because the number is A0) is set in the A register, the value set in the A register is added to the A register, and the value of the A register after the addition is added again to the A register. This is equivalent to quadrupling the value initially set in the A register. Further, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register. That is, a new address corresponding to the push order instruction number is set in the HL register by adding a value obtained by multiplying the value of the push order instruction number by four to the start address of the stop acceptance designation table T1 or T2.

  In step S1806, a push order designation command output request is set. Specifically, a higher value (“71H”) of a predetermined value (“7100H”) for identifying the data of the push order instruction number is set in the D register, and further, the HL register Set the value stored in the address indicated by (matching) the value obtained by adding “0” to the value stored in the E register (the process of adding “0” to the value in the HL register) And the value of the HL register has not been updated). In step S1807, a symbol stop test signal is output.

  In the symbol stop test signal output, as shown in FIG. 37B, first, address data is saved (step S1821). Specifically, the address data stored in the HL register is saved in the stack area. Next, the data register address of the serial communication test output port (the test output port SO0) is set (step S1822). Specifically, the address of the data register of the test output port SO0 (referred to as “FE53H”) is set in the HL register. Next, the first command is written (step S1823). Specifically, the value of the D register is set to the address indicated by the value of the HL register. Subsequently, the second command is written (step S1824). Specifically, the value of the E register (above “71H”) is set to the address indicated by the value of the HL register. Next, the SUM command is calculated (step S1825). Specifically, the value of the D register is set in the A register, the value of the E register is added to the value of the A register, and “2” is added to the value of the A register. Then, the value of the A register and “10000000B” are ORed.

  Next, the SUM command is written (step S1826). Specifically, the A register value is set to the address (data register of the test output port SO0) indicated by the value of the HL register. Then, the address data is restored (step S1827) and the process returns. Specifically, the restoration of the address data is a process of setting the address data saved in the stack area in the HL register. The following effects can be obtained by using the SUM command as follows. In other words, as outlined above, the test signal is output to the test apparatus via the relay apparatus. In this relay apparatus, the correctness of the first and second commands is determined based on the SUM command. If it is determined to be correct, the first and second commands can be output to the test apparatus, and if it is determined to be incorrect, it can be prevented from being output. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a symbol stop test signal carrying erroneous information from being output to the test apparatus. The relay device determines whether the command is a first or second command or a SUM command, with a data value of bit 7 (“0” for the first and second commands, “1” for the SUM command). It is possible to judge by.

  After executing the symbol stop test signal output, the process advances to step S1809 to set a left reel stop acceptance position designation command output request. Specifically, the value of the D register is incremented by “1”. That is, the value of the D register is changed from “71H” to “72H”. The value “72H” is a higher value than the value (“7200H”) set to identify the data of the left reel stop reception position. Further, the value stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the value of the HL register is set in the E register (instead of performing the process of adding “1” to the value of the HL register. Value has not been updated). Next, it progresses to step S1810 and performs the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal output.

  After execution of the symbol stop test signal output, the process advances to step S1811 to set a middle reel stop acceptance position designation command output request. Specifically, the value of the D register is incremented by “1”. That is, the value of the D register is changed from “72H” to “73H”. The value “73H” is a value higher than the value (“7300H”) set to identify the data at the middle reel stop reception position. Further, the value stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “2” to the value of the HL register is set in the E register (instead of performing the process of adding “2” to the value of the HL register. Value has not been updated). Next, it progresses to step S1812, and the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal output is performed.

  After execution of the symbol stop test signal output, the process proceeds to step S1813 to set a right reel stop acceptance position designation command output request. Specifically, the value of the D register is incremented by “1”. That is, the value of the D register is changed from “73H” to “74H”. The value “74H” is a higher value than the value (“7400H”) set to identify the data at the right reel stop reception position. Further, the value stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “3” to the value of the HL register is set in the E register (instead of performing the process of adding “3” to the value of the HL register. Value has not been updated). Next, it progresses to step S1814 and performs the above-mentioned symbol stop test signal output.

  After execution of the symbol stop test signal output, an end process (step S1815) is performed and the process returns. In this end processing, the data stored in each register saved in the preparation processing in step S1801 is restored, the stack pointer is restored in the first PRG area, and the like. As described above, in the present embodiment, the symbol stop test signal output process is performed after the push order instruction number is selected and the process of displaying it (push order instruction display process) is executed. By doing so, the process of storing the information of the selected push order instruction number in the push order instruction number storage area and the process of reading and displaying the information of the push order instruction number stored therein can be continuously performed. As a result, the flow of processing becomes smooth. On the other hand, after selecting the push order instruction number, it may be possible to execute the symbol stop test signal output process and then perform the symbol stop test signal output process. In this case, information on the selected push order instruction number is used. Since the process of storing in the press order instruction number storage area and the process of reading and displaying the information of the press order instruction number stored there are performed across the symbol stop test signal output process, the flow of the process It becomes complicated and the start of display becomes slow.

  Upon return from the symbol stop test signal output process described above, the process proceeds to step S19 in FIG. 33, an interrupt is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S20. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S16 that the test specification is not satisfied, the process proceeds directly to step S20. In this step S20, the data of the push order instruction number is stored in the transmission buffer (CB) to the sub-control means (sub). By storing the data in the transmission buffer, the data of the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub.

  Next, a mask process is performed on the winning / RP push order instruction number (step S21), and the data of the effect group number (see FIG. 19) determined by the mask process is stored in the transmission buffer (step S22). By saving the data in the transmission buffer, the data of the production group number is transmitted to the sub. Further, the data of the push order instruction number of the accessory is stored in the transmission buffer (step S23). By storing the data in the transmission buffer, the data of the push order instruction number of the accessory is transmitted to the sub.

  Next, reel rotation start preparation processing is performed (step S24). In this reel rotation start preparation process, as shown in FIG. 38A, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has passed (step S101). Specifically, the value of the minimum game time timer described below is set. It is determined whether or not it is “0”. If it is “0”, it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, and the process proceeds to the next step. If it is not “0”, the minimum game time has elapsed. It judges that it is not, and the process which repeats this judgment is performed. As described above, the minimum game time is a time (for example, a minimum amount of time that must be secured from the start of rotation of all reels in one game to the start of rotation of all reels in the next game (for example, 4.1 seconds). Next, a minimum game time is newly set (step S102). Specifically, a value of “1836” (1836 × 2.235 ms≈4100 ms) is set in the minimum game time timer set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM. The set timer value is decremented by “1” each time a timer interrupt process described later is executed, and remains “0” after becoming “0”.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the in-test flag is ON (step S103). If the in-test flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S103, the above-described winning information output period timer is set (set value “25”), and the process returns. The set timer value is decremented by “1” every time a timer interrupt process described later is executed, and remains “0” after becoming “0”. On the other hand, if the in-test flag is not ON, the process returns without setting the winning information output period timer. As described above, in the reel rotation start preparation process in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the test specification is not (a mass production specification) when the power is turned on, and the in-test flag is set to OFF, the winning information output period timer is set. It will never be done. As will be described later, if the winning information output period timer is not set, the test signal carrying the actual winning information will not be output, so that the winning information can be prevented from being illegally acquired from the test signal. .

  In addition, as a modified example (for example, an example corresponding to modified example J1 of the test specification determination preparation process described above (see FIG. 32B)), a reel rotation start preparation process (modified example K1) shown in FIG. ) May be performed. In this reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K1), a new minimum game time is set (step S102A) by confirming the elapse of the minimum game time (step S101A), and then the input port is read (specifically, terminal PI0). To read each potential level of PI7) (step S1021A), and determines whether or not the potential of the terminal PI0 is the test level (step S1022A). If the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104A) and the process returns. If not, the winning information output period timer is not set. Return to In the case of this modified example K1, whether or not it is a test specification is determined for each game in the reel rotation start preparation process. If it is determined that the test specification is not in one game, the winning information output period timer is not set and the test signal carrying the actual winning information is not output, but in the subsequent game, the test specification is (PI0). Is determined as a test level), a winning information output period timer is set, and a test signal carrying actual winning information is output. For this reason, there is an advantage in that it is not necessary to perform processing for determining whether or not the test specification is at power-on and the control processing at power-on can be simplified, but PI0 is artificially set to the test level. In the case where a fraudulent act is performed, winning information may be obtained illegally from the test signal.

  As another modified example (for example, an example corresponding to modified example J2 of the test specification determination preparation process described above (see FIG. 32C)), a reel rotation start preparation process (modified example K2) shown in FIG. ) May be performed. In this reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K2), a new minimum game time is set (step S102B) by checking the progress of the minimum game time (step S101B), and then each potential level of the terminals PI0 to PI7 is read. (Step S1021B), it is determined whether or not the current potential of the terminal PI0 (obtained this time) is at the test level (Step S1023B). Here, when the potential of the terminal PI0 is the test level, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored when the power is turned on is also the test level (the potential of the terminal PI0 and the potential of PI0 when the power is turned on are It is determined whether or not they match at the test level (step S1024B). If the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at power-on is also at the test level, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104B) and the process returns. On the other hand, if the current potential of the terminal PI0 is not at the test level, or if the potential of PI0 when the power is turned on is not at the test level, the process returns without setting the winning information output period timer. In this modified example K2, if the PI0 potential at power-on is not at the test level, the winning information output period timer is not set even if the PI0 potential is at the test level. Therefore, even if an illegal act of artificially setting PI0 to the test level is performed, winning information can be prevented from being illegally acquired from the test signal.

  As still another modification example (for example, another example corresponding to the modification example J2 of the test specification determination preparation process), the reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K3) shown in FIG. 38D may be performed. . In this reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K3), a new minimum game time is set (step S102C) by confirming the elapse of the minimum game time (step S101C), and then each potential level of the terminals PI0 to PI7 is read. (Step S1021C), it is determined whether or not the potential of the terminal PI0 this time (obtained this time) is at the test level (Step S1023C). Here, when the potential of the terminal PI0 is the test level, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored when the power is turned on is also the test level (the potential of the terminal PI0 and the potential of PI0 when the power is turned on are It is determined whether or not they match at the test level (step S1024C). If the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at power-on is also at the test level, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104C) and the process returns. On the other hand, the potential of the terminal PI0 is the test level, but if the potential of PI0 when the power is turned on is not the test level, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored when the power is turned on is changed to the test level ( Step S1025C) Return.

  In the next game rotation start preparation process (modified example K3), when the potential of the current terminal PI0 is at the test level, and the changed potential of PI0 when the power is turned on is also at the test level. The winning information output period timer is set. Thus, in the case of the modified example K3, even if the potential of PI0 at the time of power-on is not at the test level, if the potential of PI0 is at the test level after that, the potential of PI0 at the time of power-on is also at the time of test There is a possibility that the winning information output period timer is set in the game after being rewritten to the level. For this reason, even if the potential of PI0 at the time of power-on is erroneously stored due to the influence of noise or the like, it is possible to correct it and output a test signal carrying actual winning information. In the case of mass production specifications, there is a possibility that an illegal act of artificially setting PI0 to the test level may be performed, but at the stage where the potential of the terminal PI0 and the potential of PI0 at the time of power-on do not match, By setting the error notification to alert the game clerk, etc., and then monitoring whether fraud has been performed, the winning information can be obtained illegally from the test signal. This can be prevented.

  As another modification example (for example, another example corresponding to the modification example J2 of the test specification determination preparation process), the reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K4) shown in FIG. 39A is performed. Also good. In this reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K4), a new minimum game time is set (step S102D) by confirming the elapse of the minimum game time (step S101D), and then each potential level of the terminals PI0 to PI7 is read. In step S1021D, it is determined whether or not the current (currently acquired) terminal PI0 potential level matches the potential level of the terminal PI0 stored when the power is turned on (step S1026D). Here, if they match, it is determined whether or not the current potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level (step S1027D). If the current potential at the terminal PI0 is at the test level, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104D) and the process returns. If not, the winning information output period timer is not set. Return. On the other hand, if the potential level of the current terminal PI0 does not match the potential level of the terminal PI0 when the power is turned on in step S1026D, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored when the power is turned on is changed to the level for mass production (step S1026D). S1028D) Return.

  As described above, in the modification K4, when the potential level of the current terminal PI0 and the potential level of the terminal PI0 when the power is turned on do not match, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored when the power is turned on is changed to the level during mass production. . Then, even if the potential level of the terminal PI0 read in the reel rotation start preparation process (change example K4) in the subsequent game is the test level, the potential level of the terminal PI0 when the power is turned on (the level at the time of mass production) Therefore, the winning information output period timer is not set. In addition, when the potential level of the terminal PI0 acquired after the next game is the level at the time of mass production, it matches the potential level of the terminal PI0 when the power is turned on, but the potential level of the terminal PI0 is not the level at the time of testing. Therefore, the winning information output period timer is never set. That is, if a situation occurs in which the potential level of the terminal PI0 at power-on and the newly acquired potential level of the terminal PI0 do not coincide with each other, the winning information output period timer is not set thereafter, and the test signal It is possible to prevent the winning information from being illegally acquired.

  As another modification example (for example, an example corresponding to modification examples L1 and L2 of the test signal output process described later), the reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K5) shown in FIG. 39B may be performed. Good. In this reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K5), a new minimum game time is set (step S102E) and a winning information output period timer is set (step S104E) by confirming the elapse of the minimum game time (step S101E). And return. As described above, in the modification example K5, in the reel rotation start preparation process, a process for determining whether or not the test specification is satisfied is not performed (performed in a timer interrupt process described later).

  Further, as another modification example (for example, another example corresponding to modification examples L1 and L2 of the test signal output process described later), the reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K6) shown in FIG. 39C is performed. It may be. In this reel rotation start preparation process (modification example K6), a new minimum game time is set (step S102F) by confirming the elapse of the minimum game time (step S101F). Acquired information on the role determination result number. Specifically, the data value stored in the above-mentioned winning combination combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27D) is set in the H register, and the above winning / RP combination determination result is stored in the L register. A process of setting the data value stored in the number storage area (see FIG. 27C) is performed. Next, identifier data is set (step S1032F). Specifically, a process of setting bit 7 of the H register to “1” and setting bit 6 of the L register to “1” is performed. Next, the combination determination result information is stored (step S1033F). Specifically, the H register value is stored in the above-described winning item winning information storage area (see FIG. 29B), and the L register value is stored in the above winning / RP winning information storing area (see FIG. 29A). (See)). Then, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104F) and the process returns. As described above, also in the modified example K6, in the reel rotation start preparation process, a process for determining whether or not the test specification is satisfied is not performed (performed in a timer interrupt process described later).

  Upon return from the reel rotation start preparation process, the process proceeds to step S25 in FIG. 33, where a reel stop management process is performed. In this reel stop management process, the rotation state from the start of rotation of each reel to the constant speed state is managed, and when the operation of the stop switch is accepted, the received timing and the result of the role determination process are determined. Accordingly, a stoppable position is determined, and processing for managing the rotation state from the deceleration of the reel to the stop is performed.

  Next, a display determination process for confirming the stop display symbol in each reel is performed (step S26), and a payout process is further performed (step S27). In this payout process, when the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is a corresponding symbol of a winning combination (small role) that is a game medal payout target, a game medal is paid out. The game medals are paid out by a process of adding to the number of pools when the pool can be stored, and when the number of pools reaches the upper limit, the game medals are actually paid out from the hopper.

  Next, a game end check process is performed (step S28). In this game end check process, as shown in FIG. 40, first, the data of the combination determination result number is cleared (step S111). Specifically, the winning / RP combination determination result number data (winning / RP combination determination result number flag) stored in the above-described winning / RP combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27C). Process to clear. Further, in a game in which the BB action symbol is stopped and displayed, the data of the combination determination result number of the combination stored in the above-mentioned combination combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27D) A process of clearing the combination determination result number flag) is also performed. Subsequently, the re-game operation state flag is cleared (step S112). Specifically, a process of setting bit 0 of the operation state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) to “0” (clearing the re-game operation state flag) is performed.

  Next, BB operation management processing is performed (step S113). In this BB operation management process, as shown in FIG. 41A, first, an operation state flag is checked (step S131). Specifically, a process of setting the data value stored in the operation state flag storage area in the A register is performed. Further, the A register value is shifted right by 1 bit. For example, when the BB and RB are in operation, the A register value when set is “00011000B”, and the A register value after the right shift is “00001100B”. At this time, the sero flag = “0”. Next, it is determined whether the BB is operating (step S114). Specifically, it is determined whether the zero flag is “0” or “1”. If it is “0”, it is determined that the BB is operating, and if it is “1”, it is determined that the BB is not operating. Note that the right shift is not performed, and it is determined whether bit 3 of the A register value when set is “1” (BB is in operation) or “0” (BB is not in operation). Good.

  If it is determined that the BB is operating, data on the number of medals that can be acquired (remaining number) in the BB is acquired (step S133). Specifically, a process of setting data of the number of game medals that can be acquired (remaining number) stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM in the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the BB operation is finished (step S134). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value set in the A register is “0” (= the medal payout number in BB exceeds “450”) (or whether the zero flag is “1”). If “0”, the BB operation ends, and if not “0”, the BB operation is determined to be continued. Here, when it is determined that the BB operation is finished, the BB operation state flag and the RB operation state flag are cleared (step S134). Specifically, a process of saving the A register value (which is “00000000B” at this time) in the operation state flag storage area is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S132 that the BB is not operated, the process returns to step S133 to S135 without performing the process. If it is determined in step S134 that the BB operation is continued, the process in step S135 is not performed. Return to

  With the return from the BB operation management process, the process proceeds to step S114 in FIG. 40, and it is determined whether or not the RB is operating. Specifically, it is determined whether bit 4 of the data value stored in the operation state flag storage area is “1” or “0”, and if “1”, “0” during RB operation. If so, a process for determining that the RB is not activated is performed. If it is determined that the RB is in operation, an RB operation management process is performed (step S115).

  In this RB operation management process, as shown in FIG. 41B, first, the possible number of games in the RB is decremented by “1” (step S141). Specifically, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the above-mentioned RB game possible number counter and updating it is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the possible number of games in the RB is “0” (step S142). Specifically, a process for determining whether or not the value of the updated RB game possible number counter is “0” (or whether or not the zero flag is “1” as a result of the calculation to update the counter value). I do. Here, if the possible number of games in the RB is not “0”, it is determined whether or not the number of game medals paid out in the current game is “0” (= whether or not a small role is not established) (step) S143). If the medal payout number is not “0” (= small role is established), the number of possible winnings in the RB is decremented by “1” (step S144). Specifically, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the above-mentioned RB winning possible number counter and updating it is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has ended (step S145). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated RB winning possible number counter is “0”. If it is “0”, it is determined that the RB operation is completed, and if it is not “0”, it is determined that the RB operation is continued. Process. Here, when it is determined that the RB operation has ended, or when it is determined in step S142 that the possible number of games during the RB is “0”, the RB operation state flag is cleared (step S146). Specifically, a process of updating bit 4 of the operation state flag storage area to “0” is performed. Next, the standby time at the end of the RB operation is set (step S147). Specifically, a process of setting “0” = “00000000B” in the B register and “5” = “00000101B” in the C register is performed. Next, the waiting time waiting process described below is performed (step S148), and the process returns. If it is determined in step S143 that the medal payout number is “0”, the process returns without performing steps S144 to S148. If it is determined in step S145 that the RB operation is continued, The process returns without performing the processes of steps S146 to S148.

  In the waiting time waiting process, as shown in FIG. 41C, first, it is determined whether or not the waiting time has elapsed (step S151). Specifically, the value of the BC register is determined. When the B register value = “0” and the C register value = “0”, it is determined that the standby time has elapsed, and otherwise, the standby time has elapsed. Judge that it is not. Here, when the standby time has not elapsed, an interrupt waiting process is performed (step S152). In this interrupt waiting process, as shown in FIG. 41D, an interrupt counter value is acquired (step S161). Specifically, of the 16-bit counter value in the interrupt counter set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (here, two address areas of “F02BH” and “F02CH”) The counter value data (value stored in “F02CH”) is set in the A register. Then, it waits in that state until the interrupt counter value changes (the interrupt counter value is updated in step MT13 of a timer interrupt process described later) (step S162). Specifically, an arithmetic process for subtracting the counter value stored in “F02C” from the A register value is executed. If the arithmetic result is “0” (zero flag = “1”), the interrupt counter value changes. It is determined that there is none, and if the calculation result is not “0” (zero flag = “0”), it is determined that the interrupt counter value has changed. After executing this interrupt waiting process, the waiting time is updated (the value of the C register is subtracted by “1”) (step S153), and the process returns to step S151.

  Upon return from the RB operation management process, the process proceeds to step S116 in FIG. 40, and the RT transition process is executed. In this RT transition process, as shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not non-RT is set (step S171), and if it is not set to non-RT, it is determined whether or not RT1 is set. (Step S172). Here, if it is set to RT1, it is determined whether or not re-playing combination 5 (RT2 transition RP) is established (step S173), and if established, it is set to RT2 (step S174), Return. On the other hand, if it is not set to RT1 in the determination of step S172, it is determined whether or not it is set to RT2 (step S175). Here, when it is set to RT2, it is determined whether or not the re-gamer 6 (RT3 transition RP) is established (step S176), and if it is established, it is set to RT3 (step S177). Return. Further, in the determination of step S176, if the re-game combination 6 is not established, it is determined whether or not the re-game combination 3 or 4 (RT1 transition RP) is established (step S178). In this case, RT1 is set (step S179), and the process returns.

  Furthermore, in the determination of step S175, if it is not set to RT2, it is determined whether or not it is set to RT3 (step S180). Here, if it is set to RT3, it is determined whether or not the re-game combination 3 or 4 (RT1 transition RP) is established (step S178), and if it is established, it is set to RT1 (step S179). ), Return. On the other hand, if it is not set to RT3 in the determination of step S180, it is determined whether or not it is set to RT4 (step S181). Here, if it is set to RT4, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S182), and if established, it is set to RT5 (step S183) and the process returns and is not established. If it does, the setting of RT4 is maintained and the process returns. Further, in the determination of step S181, if it is not set to RT4 (in this case, it is set to RT5), it is determined whether or not the number of game medals paid out in BB exceeds “450” ( Step S184), if exceeded, set to non-RT (step S185) and return; if not, return with setting of RT5 maintained.

  Further, when the determination at step S171 is set to non-RT, or when the re-game combination 3 or 4 is not established at the determination at step S178, it is determined whether or not the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. (Step S186) If the stop display is made, set to RT1 and return. On the other hand, if the specific symbol is not displayed in a stopped state, or if the re-game combination 5 is not established in the determination in step S173, whether or not the BB combination is won in the game (determining the combination of the combination) It is determined whether or not result number 1 has been selected (step S188). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S189), and if not, it is set to RT4 (step S190) and the process returns and is established. If so, it is set to RT5 (step S191) and the process returns. If the BB combination is not won, the RT state is maintained and the process returns.

  With the return from the RT transition process, the process proceeds to step S117 in FIG. 40 to determine which game mode is set from the game modes 0 to 7. Then, according to the set game mode, the game mode 0 (all stop) process (step S118), the game mode 1 (all stop) process (step S119), and the game mode 2 (all stop) process (step S120). , Game mode 3 (all stop) process (step S121), game mode 4 (all stop) process (step S122), game mode 5 (all stop) process (step S123), game mode 6 (all stop) process (step S124), the game mode 7 (all stops) process (step S125) is performed.

  In the game mode 0 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 43A, first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is won in the game (step S201). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S202). If established, the game mode 5 is set (step S203) and the process returns and is established. If not, the game mode 4 is set (step S204) and the process returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination is not won, it is determined whether or not the AT stock number is greater than “0” (step S205). If the AT stock number is larger than “0”, “1” is subtracted from the AT stock number (step S206), and the RAM 63 is used to manage the precursor counter (the precursor G number selected in the AT precursor G number lottery). (The counter set in the predetermined storage area) is set with the number of precursor Gs selected in the AT precursor G number lottery (step S207), set to the game mode 1 (step S208), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the number of AT stocks is “0” in the determination in step S205, the process returns to performing the processes in steps S206 to S208.

  In the game mode 1 (all stops) process, as shown in FIG. 43B, first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is won in the game (step S211). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S212). If established, the game mode 7 is set (step S213), and the number of AT stocks is further increased. Is added (step S214), and if not established, the game mode 6 is set (step S215) and the process returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination is not won, the value of the precursor counter is decremented by “1” (step S216), and it is determined whether or not the value of the precursor counter is “0” (step S217). Here, if the value of the precursor counter is “0”, the game mode 2 is set (step S218), and the process returns. If the value of the precursor counter is not “0”, the setting of the game mode 1 is maintained. And return.

  In the game mode 2 (all stops) process, as shown in FIG. 43C, it is first determined whether or not the BB combination is won in the game (step S221). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S222). If established, the game mode 7 is set (step S223), and the number of AT stocks is further increased. 1 is added (step S224) and the process returns. If not established, the game mode 6 is set (step S225) and the process returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination is not won, it is determined whether or not RT3 is set (step S226). Here, if it is set to RT3, the game mode 3 is set (step S228), the value of the AT counter is set to “50” (step S229), and the process returns, and if it is not set to RT3, It is determined whether or not the pressing order by the player matches the pressing order of the notified pressing order instruction number (step S227). If they do not match, the game mode 3 is set (step S228), the AT counter value is set to "50" (step S229), and the process returns. It returns without changing the setting and without setting the AT counter.

  In the game mode 3 (all stops) process, as shown in FIG. 44A, first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is won in the game (step S231). Here, if the BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established (step S232). If established, the game mode 7 is set (step S223), and the number of AT stocks is further increased. 1 is added (step S234) and the process returns. If not established, the game mode 6 is set (step S235) and the process returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination has not been won, it is determined whether or not the winning order lottery has been won (step S236). Here, if the player has won, the player's push order is not the selected push order instruction number (the push order instruction numbers (A7 to A9) for the push order application game) but the normal stored for determination. It is determined whether or not it matches the pressing order of the pressing order instruction numbers (A1 to A6) (step S237). If they match, the AT stock number is incremented by “1” (step S238). The process proceeds to S239, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S239 as it is. In this step S239, “1” is subtracted from the value of the AT counter. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT counter is “0” (step S240). If the value of the AT counter is “0”, it is determined whether or not the number of AT stocks is greater than “0”. (Step S241). Here, if the AT stock number is larger than “0”, “1” is subtracted from the AT stock number (step S242), “1” is set to the precursor counter (step S243), and the game mode 1 is set. (Step S244) It returns. On the other hand, if the number of AT stocks is “0” in the determination in step S241, the processing in steps S242 to S244 is not performed, the game mode is set to 0 (step S245), and the process returns to determine in step S240. If the value of the AT counter is not “0”, the processing of steps S241 to S245 is not performed, and the game mode 3 is maintained and the process returns.

  In the game mode 4 (all stops) process, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), it is first determined whether or not the BB combination is established in the game (step S251). 5 is set (step S252) and the process returns. If not established, the processes of steps S251 and S252 are not performed, and the game mode 4 is maintained and the process returns.

  In the game mode 5 (all stops) process, as shown in FIG. 44C, first, it is determined whether or not the number of game medals paid out in the BB exceeds “450” (step S261). In this case, it is determined whether or not the AT stock number is larger than “0” (step S262). If the AT stock number is greater than “0”, the AT stock number is decremented by “1” (step S263), the game mode 2 is set (step S264), and the process returns, and the AT stock number is “0”. In this case, the processing of steps S263 and S264 is not performed, and the game mode is set to 0 (step S265) and the process returns. If the number of game medals paid out does not exceed “450” in the determination in step S261, the process in steps S262 to S265 is not performed, and the game mode 5 is maintained and the process returns.

  In the game mode 6 (all stops) process, as shown in FIG. 45A, first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination is established in the game (step S271). Is set to 7 (step S272), the AT stock number is further incremented by “1” (step S273), and the process returns. Maintain and return.

  In the game mode 7 (all stops) process, as shown in FIG. 45B, first, it is determined whether or not the number of game medals paid out in the BB exceeds “450” (step S281). In this case, “1” is subtracted from the AT stock number (step S282), the game mode 2 is set (step S283), and the process returns. Maintain the setting and return.

  Returning from the game mode 0 (all stop) process to the game mode 7 (all stop) process described above, the game end check process shown in FIG. With the return from the game end check process, the process returns to step S1 in FIG. 33 and the game progress control process is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
In this embodiment, processing such as reading of each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by the player, detection (confirmation) of a signal level, transmission of each control command, drive control of the reel, etc. Is performed by a timer interrupt process executed every predetermined time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). In this timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 46A, first, an interrupt initial process (register saving, interrupt prohibition, etc.) is performed (step MT11), and then whether or not power-off is detected. Is determined (step MT12). Here, if a power-off is detected, a power-off process is performed (step MT24). In power-off processing, register saving, stack pointer saving, interrupt status saving, and the like are performed. In addition, processing such as holding information related to the combination determination result and information related to the RT state stored in a predetermined storage area, and calculating and storing a checksum is also performed.

  On the other hand, if power-off is not detected, a process of updating the interrupt counter value (subtracting “1”) is performed (step MT13), and further timer measurement is performed (step MT14). This timer measurement is performed by subtracting or adding a timer value of an arbitrary timer (such as the above-mentioned minimum game time timer or winning information output period timer) set in the above-described game progress control process. Next, the input port is read (step MT15). In reading the input port, signal levels such as game operation signals input to the input port are read and stored, and signal levels are determined.

  Next, a reel drive control process for controlling driving of the reels 3a to 3c (acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, etc.) is performed (step MT16). In this reel drive control process, a reel drive pulse output indicating the timing of switching the output phase (excitation phase) of the stepping motor according to the reel drive state (stopped, waiting for reel rotation, accelerating, constant speed, decelerating, etc.) Processing such as update of the counter value and acquisition, update, and output of reel drive pulse data for driving the stepping motor is performed. In the next step MT17, it is determined whether or not the reel drive control process has been executed for all the reels. If not, the process returns to step MT16 to perform the reel drive control process again. On the other hand, when it is executed for all reels, it performs a port output process for performing excitation output of reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. (step MT18), and further transmits a control command stored in the command buffer (CB). Transmission processing is performed (step MT19).

  Next, proceeding to step MT20, the outer end signal (external signal) data stored in the predetermined storage area is read, and the outer end signal is output. Next, the test signal output process described below is executed (step MT21). After the execution, the random number used for the role lottery etc. is updated (step MT22), and the interrupt end process (register return, interrupt Permission, etc.) (step MT23), and return to interrupt. As an example of change (for example, an example corresponding to change examples K5 and K6 of the reel rotation start preparation process described above (see FIGS. 39B and 39C)), as shown in FIG. After processing of the outer end signal output in step MT20, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 has a test specification (step MT201). The processing may not be executed (the test signal is not output). The determination as to whether or not the test specification is used can be made based on the ON / OFF state of the flag under test, but various other methods described above can be adopted.

  In the test signal output process, as shown in FIG. 47, the output data of the operation state test signal is set (step MT31). Specifically, the process of setting the data of the operation state flag stored in the operation state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) in the A register is performed. Next, an operating state test signal is output (step MT32). Specifically, the process of outputting (setting) the data of the operation state flag set in the A register to the test output port PO8 is performed. As a result, an operation state test signal carrying the operation state flag information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO8 to the test apparatus. As an example of modification, there is no address area for storing data of each operation state flag (re-game operation state flag, BB operation state flag, and RB operation state flag) collectively, such as an operation state flag storage area. The operation state flag data is stored in separate address areas, and the data is combined into one operation state flag data by an arithmetic process using a register and output from the test output port PO8. Also good.

  Next, the value of the winning information output period timer is acquired (step MT33). Specifically, a process of setting the timer value data of the winning information output period timer stored in the winning information output period timer storage area (see FIG. 27F) in the A register is performed. Since the timer value of the winning information output period timer is decremented by “1” in the above-described step MT14, in the process of step MT33 in the first timer interrupt process after the timer value is set to “25” The timer value is “24”. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the winning information (step MT34). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the timer value set in the A register is “0” (zero flag = “1”). If “0”, it is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning information. If it is not “0”, it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information.

  Here, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the winning item winning information (step MT35). Specifically, an operation of subtracting “12.5” from the timer value set in the A register in the above step MT33 is performed, and when the operation result is greater than “0” (the timer value of the winning information output period timer is “24 to 13 ”(carry flag (set to a specific bit in the F register, and“ 1 ”data is stored when the result of the operation carries or carries down) is“ 0 ”. Is determined to be the output timing of the winning item winning information, and when the calculation result is smaller than “0” (when the timer value of the winning information output period timer is “12 to 1”) (the carry flag is “1”) ")") Is determined not to be the output timing of the winning item winning information.

  If it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning combination winning information, the address of the winning combination determining result number storage area (see FIG. 27D) is set (step MT36). Specifically, the upper value “F0H” of the address value “F049H” of the combination / actor determination result number storage area is set in the H register, and the lower value “49H” of the address value “F049H” is set in the L register. Perform the process. Next, the output data of the winning item winning information is set (step MT37). Specifically, a process of setting the data of the combination determination result number of the combination stored in the combination combination determination result number storage area in the A register is performed. Further, the data of the identifier of the accessory is set (step MT38). Specifically, a process of setting bit 6 of the A register to “0” and bit 7 to “1” is performed. Then, a winning information test signal is output (step MT42). Specifically, a process of outputting (setting) the data set in the A register to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, the winning information test signal carrying the actual winning information (here, the winning item winning information) is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test apparatus.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step MT35 that it is not the output timing of the winning item winning information, the process proceeds to step MT39, where the address of the winning / RP winning combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27C) is set. . Specifically, the upper value “F0H” of the address value “F048H” in the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area is set in the H register, and the lower value “48H” of the address value “F048H” is set in the L register. Perform the setting process. Next, output data of winning / RP winning information is set (step MT40). Specifically, the process of setting the data of the winning / RP combination determination result number stored in the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area in the A register is performed. Further, the winning / RP identifier data is set (step MT41). Specifically, a process of setting bit 6 of the A register to “1” and bit 7 to “0” is performed. Then, a winning information test signal is output (step MT42). Specifically, a process of outputting (setting) the data set in the A register to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, a winning information test signal carrying actual winning information (here, winning / RP winning information) is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test apparatus.

  If it is determined in step MT34 that the output timing of the winning information is not reached, the process proceeds to step MT42 without performing the processing in steps MT35 to MT41, and a winning information test signal is output. In this case, a winning information test signal (“00000000B” signal) that does not carry actual winning information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test apparatus. As an example of a change, when it is determined in step MT34 that it is not the output timing of the winning information, the winning information test signal may not be output (return directly from step MT34).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the period from the value of the winning information output period timer from “24” to “13”, the winning information test signal carrying the winning item winning information is output, and the winning information output period timer is output. During the period from the value of “12” to “1”, a winning information test signal carrying the winning / RP winning information is output. In addition, during a period in which the value of the winning information output period timer is “0”, a winning information test signal that does not carry actual winning information is output. As described above, the winning information output period timer is set when it is determined that the slot machine 1 is the test specification, and is not set when it is determined that it is the mass production specification (the timer value is always “0”). Therefore, in the mass production specification, the winning information test signal carrying the actual winning information is not output. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the winning information from being illegally acquired from the winning information test signal.

  As a modified example of the test signal output process (for example, an example corresponding to the above-described reel rotation start preparation process (modified example K5)), the test signal output process (modified example L1) shown in FIG. 48 is executed. Also good. Steps MT31A to MT34A and MT35A to MT42A in the test signal output process (modified example L1) are the same as steps MT31 to MT34 and MT35 to MT42 in the test signal output process. The difference is that in step MT34A, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 has the test specification (the specific determination method may employ the various methods described above). (Step MT3401A), if it is determined that the test specification is not (the mass production specification), the dummy winning information output data (for example, “11111111B”) is set (step MT3402A). In other words, in this test signal output process (modification example L1), if it is determined that the production information is in the production specification even at the output timing of the winning information, a winning information test signal carrying dummy winning information is output. It has become so.

  Furthermore, as another modified example of the test signal output process (for example, an example corresponding to the above-described reel rotation start preparation process (modified example K6)), the test signal output process (modified example L2) shown in FIG. 49 is executed. You may make it do. Steps MT31A to MT34A and MT42A in the test signal output process (modified example L2) are the same as steps MT31 to MT34 and MT42 in the test signal output process. Further, in step MT34B, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 is in the test specification (specific determination methods can employ the various methods described above). (Step MT3401B) If it is determined that the test specification is not (the mass production specification), dummy winning information output data is set (Step MT3402B), which is the same as the test signal output processing (modified example L1). It is. The difference is that the processing of steps MT3403B to MT3406B is performed.

  That is, if it is determined in step MT3401B that the test specification is used, the process proceeds to step MT3403B, and the address of the winning item winning information storage area (see FIG. 29B) is set (step MT3403B). Specifically, a process of setting the upper value “F0H” of the address value “F04DH” of the accessory winning information storage area in the H register and setting the lower value “4DH” of the address value “F04DH” in the L register. I do. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the winning item winning information (step MT3404B). If it is not the outputting timing of the winning item winning information, the winning / RP winning information storage area (see FIG. 29A) Is set (step MT3405B). Specifically, the upper value “F0H” of the address value “F04CH” of the winning / RP winning information storage area is set in the H register, and the lower value “4CH” of the address value “F04CH” is set in the L register. Process. Then, output data of winning information is set (step MT3406B). Specifically, when the address of the winning combination information storage area is set in the HL register, the winning combination data is set in the A register, and the winning / RP winning information storage area is set in the HL register. If it is, processing for setting the data of the winning / RP winning information in the A register is performed. In this way, in the test signal output process (modified example L2), the winning information data to which the identifier data has already been added is directly set and output, so the process of setting the identifier data is not performed.

  Other control processes performed in the main control unit 100 include a main control power-on process and a main control setting change process. The main control power-on process is a process that is performed when power supply to the main control unit 100 is started (at power-on). A temporary stack pointer is set, a checksum is calculated, checked, and the like. Processing is performed so that power recovery processing can be performed. Further, it is determined whether or not the setting key type switch 83 is turned on. If the setting key type switch 83 is turned on, the process proceeds to a main control setting change process described below. On the other hand, when the setting key type switch 83 is not turned on, the stack pointer is restored and the interrupt is activated, and further, information on the result of determining the combination stored in the predetermined storage area when the power is turned off, A game is played based on information about the RT state.

  The main control setting change process is a process executed when the setting key type switch 83 is turned on in the above-described main control power-on process, and the setting change command operation of the setting change switch 84 by the game store clerk is confirmed. In this case, the stack pointer is initialized, the interrupt is initialized, and the stored game information is cleared when the power is turned off. Further, the set value set at the time of changing the setting is stored in a predetermined storage area, and the process proceeds to the above-described game progress control process.

<Program start processing>
Next, the program start process executed by the sub main control means 200A will be described. As shown in FIG. 50A, the program start process is started when the power is turned on. First, the interrupt is prohibited (step U11), and then various initialization processes (initialization of the CPU and RAM) are performed. And checksum calculation) (step U12). Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off (step U13).

  Here, if the two match, it is determined whether or not the state is restored from the state in which the power interruption occurred during one command processing of the sub-main loop processing described below (hereinafter referred to as “complete recovery”) ( Step U14) If it is a complete return, interrupt is permitted (Step U15), and the process returns to the one command processing that was being executed when the power was turned off. On the other hand, if it is determined in step U13 that the checksums do not match, the RAM is cleared (step U16), and the process proceeds to sub-main loop processing. If it is determined in step U14 that there is no complete return, the process proceeds directly to the sub main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing>
In the sub main loop process, as shown in FIG. 50B, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step V11), and then the operation of the WDT is started (step V12). Next, an interrupt is permitted (step V13), and processing every 16 ms (monitoring whether the image display device is normally activated, counting the power-on time, and signal data (command) to be transmitted to the image display device are predetermined. Storage in a storage area (command buffer), etc.) (step V14).

  Next, one command processing (processing based on a control command from the main control means 100, an example will be described later) is performed (step V15), and it is determined whether 16 ms (time can be arbitrarily set) has elapsed. (Step V16) If the time has not elapsed, the process returns to Step V15. On the other hand, if 16 ms has elapsed, the process returns to step V11.

<Power-off process>
The power-off process shown in FIG. 50 (C) is a process that is started when the sub-main control unit 200A detects a power-off, and first stops WDT (step W11) and is then in the program start process. (Step W12). If the program start processing is not in progress, a checksum is calculated (step W13), and various data (checksum calculation result, address of the executed program, etc.) are saved (held) (step W14). Proceed to step W15. On the other hand, if it is determined in step W12 that the program start process is being performed, the process proceeds to step W15 without performing the processes in steps W13 and W14.

  In Step W15, it is determined whether or not 500 ms (time can be arbitrarily set) has elapsed. Here, if 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is terminated. On the other hand, if 500 ms has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not the power has been restored (step W16). If the power is restored, the number of instantaneous interruptions is updated (step W17), the WDT operation is started (step W18), and the process being executed when the power is turned off is returned. On the other hand, if the power is not restored in the determination in step W16, the process returns to step W15.

<1 command processing>
In the one-command processing shown in FIG. 51A, it is determined whether or not a control command (hereinafter referred to as “special combination command”) including information on the combination determination result number of an accessory has been received (step V101). Here, when the special combination command is received, the process proceeds to step V102, and the process at the time of the start lever is executed. In the process at the time of the start lever, as shown in FIG. 51B, it is first determined whether or not the push order instruction number is any of A1 to A9 (the push order is preceded by the special role command). Since the control command including the information of the instruction number is received, it is determined based on it (step V121). If the push order instruction number is any of A1 to A9, a push order navigation effect corresponding to the received push order instruction number is performed (step V122), and the process returns. On the other hand, when the push order instruction numbers are not A1 to A9 (in the case of A0), the process returns without performing the process of step V122.

  With the return from the process at the time of the start lever, the 1-command process shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the special command is not received in the determination of step V101 of the one-command processing, the process proceeds to step V103, and a control command including information on the reel rotation start (hereinafter referred to as “reel rotation start command”). Is received. If a reel rotation start command is received, the process proceeds to step V104, processing such as effect switching is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the reel rotation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V105, where has received a control command including information on the first cylinder stop reception (hereinafter referred to as “first cylinder stop reception command”)? Determine whether or not. If the first cylinder stop acceptance command is received, the process proceeds to step V106, and the process at the time of the first cylinder trunk acceptance is performed.

  In the process at the time of accepting the first torso stop, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), it is first determined whether or not the push order navigation effect is being executed (step V141). Here, if the push order navigation effect is not being executed, the process at the time of accepting the first cylinder stop is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the push order navigation effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step V142 to determine whether or not the first push order executed by the player is correct. If the answer is correct in the push order, the process proceeds to step V143, and the process of switching the push order navigation effect (including the deletion of the display of the first push order) is performed and the process returns. On the other hand, if the push order is incorrect, the process proceeds to step V144 to end the push order navigation effect, execute the failure effect (the effect of notifying that the push order is incorrect) (step V145), and return. To do.

  With the return from the process at the time of accepting the first cylinder stop, the one-command process shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step V105 of the one-command processing that the first cylinder stop acceptance command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V107, and a control command including information on the first cylinder cylinder stop (hereinafter referred to as “first command”). It is determined whether or not a “rotor stop command” is received. Here, if the first cylinder stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V108, the winning expectation display (including stop sound and the like) is processed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the first cylinder stop stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V109 to receive a control command (hereinafter referred to as a “second cylinder stop reception command”) including information on the second cylinder stop reception. Determine whether or not. If the second cylinder stop acceptance command is received, the process proceeds to step V110, and the process at the time of the second cylinder suspension acceptance is performed.

  In the process at the time of accepting the second torso stop, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), it is first determined whether or not the push order navigation effect is being executed (step V151). Here, if the push order navigation effect is not being executed, the process at the time of accepting the second cylinder stop is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the push order navigation effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step V152 to determine whether or not the second push order executed by the player is correct. If the answer is correct in the push order, the process proceeds to step V153, where the process of switching the push order navigation effect (including the deletion of the second push order display) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the answer is incorrect, the process proceeds to step V154 to end the push order navigation effect, execute the failure effect (step V155), and return.

  With the return from the process at the time of accepting the second cylinder stop, the one-command process shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step V109 of the one-command processing that the second cylinder stop acceptance command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V111, and a control command including information on the second cylinder cylinder stop (hereinafter referred to as “second command”). It is determined whether or not a “rotor stop command” is received. Here, when the second cylinder stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V112, a process of winning expectation display (including a case where a stop sound, a tempering sound is output, etc.) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the second cylinder stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V113, and a control command including information on the third cylinder stop reception (hereinafter referred to as "third cylinder stop reception command") is received. Determine whether or not. Here, if the third cylinder stop reception command is received, the process proceeds to step V114, and the process at the time of the third cylinder stop reception is performed.

  In the process at the time of accepting the third torso stop, as shown in FIG. 52C, first, it is determined whether or not the push order navigation effect is being executed (step V161). Here, if the push order navigation effect is not being executed, the process at the time of accepting the third cylinder stop is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the push order navigation effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step V162 to end the push order navigation effect and return.

  With the return from the process at the time of accepting the third cylinder stop, the one-command process shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step V113 in the one-command processing that the third cylinder stop acceptance command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V115, and a control command including information on the third cylinder cylinder stop (hereinafter referred to as “third command”). It is determined whether or not a “rotor stop command” is received. If the third cylinder stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V116, a winning expectation display process (including a stop sound and the like) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the third cylinder stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V117, and it is determined whether or not a control command (stopping cylinder command) including stop display symbol information has been received. Here, when the all-round cylinder stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V118, processing such as switching of effects is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the full-turn cylinder stop command has not been received, the process directly returns.

<< Second Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “second type slot machine”) will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. The slot machine of the second form has the same configuration as the main part of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the description of the common parts is omitted. Also, the flow of main control processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and description thereof is also omitted.

<Circuit configuration of main control board (difference between test specifications and mass production specifications)>
In the slot machine 1 described above, by connecting a pull-up resistor, a pull-down resistor, or a voltage dividing circuit to the terminal PI0 of the main IC, the potential of the terminal PI0 differs between the test specification and the mass production specification. (See FIGS. 24 and 25). On the other hand, in the slot machine of the second form, as shown in FIG. 53, in the test specification, the main IC terminal PI0 and the test IC2 terminal Q7 (terminals for outputting signals from the main IC terminal D7). ) (Hereinafter referred to as “special circuit”) (see (A) in the same figure), and in the mass-production type, since the test IC 2 is not mounted, such a special circuit is not provided (same as above). It is configured as shown in FIG.

<Test signal output processing>
In the above-described slot machine 1, the control processing when outputting each test signal of the symbol stop test signal, the operation state test signal, and the winning information test signal to the test apparatus in the case of the test specification has been described. In the embodiment of the slot machine, in addition to this, a control process when outputting an RT information test signal for transmitting the RT setting state will be described. As for the output of the symbol stop test signal, the same control processing as the first embodiment (symbol stop test signal output processing shown in FIG. 37) is performed. However, regarding the output of the operating state test signal and the winning information test signal, The control process is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a control process related to the output of the RT information test signal, the operating state test signal, and the winning information test signal will be described.

  First, in the present embodiment, the modified example J1 shown in FIG. 32B is adopted as the test specification determination preparation process executed when the power is turned on. That is, when the power is turned on, no particular processing is performed to determine whether the test specification is a mass production specification. Further, at the start of the game (before accepting the start lever operation), as shown in FIG. 54 (A), processing for setting the RT information output timing identification flag (step S2011) is executed (for example, the game start shown in FIG. 34). Executed as one step in the process). The RT information output timing identification flag is a flag that is set in a predetermined storage area (8-bit storage area) such as a RAM to identify whether or not it is the timing to output an RT information test signal. The hour is set to a value of “10000000B”. Further, after setting the RT information output timing identification flag, as shown in FIG. 54B, every time a timer interrupt is executed, a process of updating the RT information output timing identification flag (step S2021) is executed (for example, (This is executed as processing in timer measurement (step MT14) in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 46). The update process at this time is performed as a process of shifting the value of the RT information output timing identification flag to the right by 1 bit and maintaining the value of bit 7. Further, at the time of accepting the start lever operation, as shown in FIG. 54C, a process (step S2031) for clearing the RT information output timing identification flag (set to a value of “00000000B”) is executed (for example, FIG. (Executed between steps S102E and S104E of the reel rotation start preparation process (modified example K5) shown in 39 (A)).

  The value of the RT information output timing identification flag set in this way is set to “10000000B each time the timer interrupt process is executed from when it is set at the start of the game until it is cleared when the start lever operation is accepted. ”(When set) →“ 11000000B ”→“ 11100000B ”→“ 11110000B ”→“ 11111000B ”→“ 11111100B ”→“ 11111110B ”→“ 11111111B ”→“ 11111111B ”… In the meantime, the value is updated so that the value of “00000000B” is maintained as it is. This RT information output timing identification flag is used for identifying whether or not it is the output timing of the RT information test signal in the test signal output process described below.

  The test signal output process in this embodiment is an alternative to the test signal output process (see FIG. 47) executed in step MT21 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 46. As shown in FIG. First, it is determined whether or not the inspection signal is ON-input (step MT131). The inspection signal is a signal of “0” or “1” output from the terminal D7 of the main IC to the terminal PI0 via the terminal D7 of the test IC 2, the terminal Q7, and the special circuit. Then, the bit 7 (usually set to “0”) of the operating state test signal is set to “1” (hereinafter referred to as “set the inspection signal to ON”) and output to “1”. An inspection signal is output, set to “0” (hereinafter referred to as “inspection signal is set to OFF”), and output to output an inspection signal of “0” (hereinafter referred to as step MT131). The potential of the terminal PI0 is read, and if it is “1” (H level), it is determined that the inspection signal is ON, and if it is “0” (L level), it is determined that the inspection signal is OFF input.

  If it is determined that the inspection signal is ON, the process proceeds to step MT132 and the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON. The winning information output prohibition flag is a flag that is set in a predetermined bit (for example, bit 0) of a predetermined storage area such as a RAM and that determines whether or not actual winning information output is prohibited. Note that the inspection signal is ON-input only during a period from step MT135 to step MT148, which will be described later, and the inspection signal is normally OFF-input during other periods. Therefore, the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON when the potential of the terminal PI0 is forcibly set to “1” due to an illegal act or the like. In this embodiment, once the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON, the winning information test signal carrying the actual winning information is not output, so that the winning information is illegally acquired. It can be prevented. In addition, when the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON, an error notification may be performed. Further, when a predetermined error canceling operation is performed along with error notification, the winning information output prohibition flag may be set to OFF.

  After the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON in step MT132 or when it is determined in step MT131 that the inspection signal is OFF input, the process proceeds to step MT133 to determine whether or not the winning information output prohibition flag is ON. . If it is determined that the winning information output prohibition flag is not ON (OFF), it is determined whether it is the RT information or the winning information output start timing (step MT134). Specifically, when the value of the RT information output timing identification flag is “10000000B”, it is determined that it is the RT information output start timing, and when the value of the winning information output period timer is “24”, the winning information is output. It is determined that it is the start timing, and otherwise, it is determined that it is not the output start timing. Here, if it is determined that it is the output start timing of RT information or winning information, the process proceeds to step MT135, an operation state test signal in which the inspection signal is set to ON is output, and the process proceeds to step MT136. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the output start timing of the RT information or the winning information, the process proceeds to step MT136 without performing the process of step MT135.

  In this step MT136, it is determined whether or not the winning information output flag is ON. The winning information output flag is a flag for determining whether or not the actual winning information is permitted to be output, which is set in a predetermined bit (for example, bit 0) of a predetermined storage area such as a RAM. In step MT138, which will be described later, ON is set, and in step MT145, OFF is set. Here, if it is determined that the winning information output flag is not ON (OFF), it is determined whether or not the inspection signal is input ON (step MT137). If it is determined that the inspection signal is ON, the winning information is output. The flag is set to ON (step MT138), and the process proceeds to step MT139. On the other hand, if it is determined in step MT136 that the winning information output flag is not ON, the processing proceeds to step MT139 without performing the processing in steps MT137 and MT138.

  In step MT139, RT information output data is set. Specifically, a process of setting the data value of RT information stored in a predetermined storage area such as a RAM in the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the RT information output timing (step MT140). Specifically, when the value of the RT information output timing identification flag is other than “00000000B”, it is determined that the RT information is output, and when the value of the winning information output period timer is “00000000B”, the RT information is output. It is determined that it is not timing. If it is determined that it is the RT information output timing, the process proceeds to step MT147 to output an RT information test signal. Specifically, a process of outputting (setting) the data set in the A register to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, the RT information test signal carrying the RT information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test apparatus.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the output timing of the RT information, the process proceeds to step MT141, and the output data of the winning combination information is set. Specifically, a process of setting the data of the combination determination result number of the combination stored in the combination combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27D) in the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the item winning information (step MT142). Specifically, when the value of the winning information output period timer stored in the winning information output period timer storage area (see FIG. 27F) is “24 to 13”, the output timing of the winning item winning information is set. If it is determined that there is a value other than that, it is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning information of the bonus item. Here, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning item winning information, the process proceeds to Step MT147, and the winning item winning information test signal is output. Specifically, processing is performed for adding the identifier data of the accessory to the data set in the A register and outputting (setting) it to the test output port PO7. As a result, the winning combination winning information test signal carrying the winning combination winning information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the testing apparatus. When the above-mentioned winning item winning information storage area (see FIG. 29B) is provided, the winning item winning information data stored therein is set in the A register, and the testing apparatus stores it. You may make it output.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning item winning information, the process proceeds to step MT143, and the output data of the winning / RP winning information is set. Specifically, a process of setting the data of the winning / RP combination determination result number stored in the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27C) in the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the winning / RP winning information (step MT144). Specifically, when the value of the winning information output period timer is “12 to 1”, it is determined that it is the output timing of winning / RP winning information, and when it is other than that, the winning / RP winning information is determined. It is determined that it is not the output timing. If it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning / RP winning information, the process proceeds to step MT147 to output a winning / RP winning information test signal. Specifically, a process of adding the winning / RP identifier data to the data set in the A register and outputting (setting) it to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, the winning / RP winning information test signal carrying the winning / RP winning information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test apparatus. When the above-mentioned winning / RP winning information storage area (see FIG. 29A) is provided, the winning / RP winning information data stored therein is set in the A register, and the test is performed. You may make it output to an apparatus.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning / RP winning information, the process proceeds to Step MT145 and the winning information output flag is set to OFF. Next, empty winning information is set. Specifically, a process of setting data “00000000B” in the A register as empty winning information is performed. Next, the process proceeds to Step MT147, and a winning information test signal carrying empty winning information is output. Specifically, a process of outputting (setting) the data “00000000B” set in the A register to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, a winning information test signal that does not carry actual winning information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test apparatus. Further, an operation state test signal with the inspection signal set to OFF is output (step MT148), and the process returns. If it is determined in step MT133 that the winning information output prohibition flag is ON, the process proceeds from step MT134 to MT145 without performing the processing from step MT134. In step MT137, the inspection signal is not input. If it is determined, the process proceeds from step MT138 to step MT145 without performing the processing from step MT138 to MT144.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, actual winning information is output only when the winning information output flag is set to ON and within the winning information output period. The winning information output flag is a timer interrupt process that is executed at the output start timing of RT information or winning information, and an operation state test signal with the inspection signal set to ON is output, and then within the same timer interrupt process Only when the inspection signal ON input is confirmed in, is set from OFF to ON. Further, when the inspection signal ON input is confirmed at a timing other than the above timing, the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON, and the actual winning information is not output. For this reason, in order to force the terminal PI0 to be set to "1" and to misrecognize that the inspection signal is ON and to acquire the winning information illegally, in order to output the actual winning information. In this timing, it is necessary to set the potential of the terminal PI0 to “1”, which is very difficult. As described above, it is extremely difficult for the slot machine of the present embodiment to illegally obtain actual winning information from the winning information test signal.

<Modification>
Hereinafter, the modified mode will be described.
In the above embodiment, the control program for the symbol stop test signal output process is stored in the second PRG area, but may be stored in the first PRG area. In this case, it is preferable that the data of the stop acceptance designation tables T1 and T2 are also stored in the first PRG area. In addition, a control program for the test signal output process (including each change example) in the timer interrupt process may be stored in the second PRG area, or a process for determining whether or not the test specification is satisfied. The control program (including each modified example) may be stored in the second PRG area. Further, the winning information output period timer may be set in the second PRG area, and a control program for setting, updating, and clearing the timer value may be stored in the second PRG area.

  In the above embodiment, the notification of the pushing order is executed from the time when the operation of the start lever is received until each reel enters the constant speed rotation state. In some games, the time until the start lever operation is accepted may be less than the minimum game time (especially, there is room until the minimum game time elapses). It is also possible to notify the push order after setting the minimum game time for the next game without performing the notification. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the time zone in which the stop switch cannot be operated even though the pressing order is notified.

  Although not set in the above embodiment, a push order flag may be set as an index for identifying whether or not the push order can be notified (in the above embodiment, the game mode). Thus, it is identified whether or not the push order can be notified). When the push order flag is ON, it indicates that the push order can be notified, and when the push order flag is OFF, it indicates that the push order cannot be notified. By providing such a push order flag, it is possible to distinguish between the case where the push order can be notified and the case where the push order cannot be notified even in the same game mode. For example, even in the game mode 0 (normal time), it is possible to set a situation in which the push order flag is turned ON and to play a push order game there. In the above embodiment, the game modes 2 (AT preparation) and 3 (AT) are managed as different game modes. However, these are managed as one game mode and whether the mode is in preparation for AT or during AT. As an index for identifying whether the mode is the AT flag, an AT flag may be set. When the AT flag is ON, it indicates that the mode is in AT, and when the AT flag is OFF, it indicates that the mode is in preparation for AT.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the push order notification by the WIN lamp 46j is started, each information of the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the combination role determination result number is in this order and the reel is in the constant speed rotation state. Before being transmitted to the sub-control means (see FIG. 22). In order to ensure that the push order notification (push order navigation effect) by the liquid crystal display device is executed before the reel enters the constant speed rotation state, the push order instruction number, It is preferable that each information of the production group number and the winning combination determination result number is set in a buffer for transmission to the sub-control means. When the push order flag is provided, it is preferable to transmit the push order flag information to the sub before each information of the effect group number and the winning combination determination result number. This is because in order to execute the push order notification by the liquid crystal display device in the process at the time of accepting the start lever operation, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the push order flag is already ON at that time.

  In the above embodiment, the game mode information and the RT state information are transmitted to the sub-control means after accepting the operation of the start lever, but may be transmitted before accepting the operation of the start lever. Good. By doing so, the sub-control means can know the game mode information and the RT state information before accepting the start lever operation, so that each process can be executed smoothly when the start lever operation is accepted. it can. For example, when transitioning from game mode 1 (precursor) to game mode 2 (AT preparation), a confirmation screen may be displayed indicating that the AT setting has been confirmed. By knowing that the process shifts to (AT preparation), the confirmation screen can be smoothly displayed when the start lever operation is accepted. In addition, the number of AT games (remaining number) may be displayed when transitioning from game mode 2 (AT preparation) to game mode 3 (AT). By knowing that the mode is shifted to mode 3 (AT), it is possible to display the number of AT games smoothly when the start lever operation is accepted (specifically, before the start lever operation is accepted, the RAM is displayed). Since the data of the number of AT games (“50”) can be set in a predetermined storage area such as (RAM 77) and the data can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the start lever operation is accepted, the AT game is accepted when the start lever operation is accepted. The number ("50") of data can be set, and then the data can be displayed earlier than when displayed on a liquid crystal display device). When the AT flag is provided, the AT flag information is also preferably transmitted before accepting the operation of the start lever.

  In the above embodiment, as described above, in order to prevent intentionally staying in the game mode 2 (AT preparation), in the case of not following the push order navigation in the game mode 2, the game mode 3 (AT) is switched to. An AT counter is set. In this case, since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the push order operation along the push order navigation has been performed in the game mode 2, the processing load can be reduced, but it is not intentional and is different from the push order navigation by mistake. When the push order operation is performed, the game mode 3 is also transferred. Therefore, if the player does not follow the replay navigation, the mode is shifted to the game mode 3. However, if the player does not follow the bell navigation (the player is merely disadvantaged), the game mode 3 may not be shifted. Good. In this case, it is possible to rescue a player who did not follow the bell navigation by mistake, but it is necessary to determine whether the player did not follow the replay navigation or the bell navigation, so that the processing load increases. Also, when the RT does not follow the push order navigation and the RT state falls, the game mode 3 is shifted. However, when the push order navigation does not follow but the RT state does not fall, the game mode 3 shifts. It may not be allowed to. In this case, since it is necessary to determine whether or not the RT state has fallen in addition to determining whether or not the push order navigation has been followed, the processing load increases. Further, in the above embodiment, when the game mode 2 is set, the RT state is set to RT3 so as to shift to the game mode 3. However, when the RT3 transition RP is won, You may make it transfer to game mode 3. FIG.

  In the above-described embodiment, the AT stock number is added when the correct answer is made to the push order hitting game. However, the addition of the AT game number (addition of the AT game number) may be a benefit. Moreover, you may make it provide a privilege (for example, special performing image production etc.) in a sub control means.

  In the above embodiment, when the setting is changed, the information related to AT (the number of AT games and the number of AT stock) is cleared, but the information on the RT state is maintained. It also has many RT states. On the other hand, only those who do not have a lot of RT gaming status and are not elected to the bonus combination (non-RT), inside the bonus that is won the bonus combination (RT1), only during bonus (RT2) Even if the specification is such that most of the game period is inside the bonus (internal specification), when the setting is changed, the AT information is cleared, but the RT state information is maintained. Also good. In addition, when the power is turned off, it is preferable to maintain the information regarding the AT and also maintain the information about the RT state (the same may be applied to the internal / medium spec).

  In the above embodiment, the command is transmitted by the serial communication method, but it may be performed by the parallel communication method. However, in the case of the parallel communication method, communication is possible even if any one of the plurality of communication lines is disconnected, so that erroneous information may be transmitted. Therefore, when the parallel communication method is used, a predetermined command (for example, “00000101B”) is transmitted at the start of each game (for example, when the start lever is operated), and the end of each game (for example, all When a command is stopped, a command (for example, “1111010B”) in which “0” and “1” of each bit are reversed is transmitted, and it is determined whether or not there is a disconnection based on the result of these logical operations. You may make it do.

  In the above embodiment, when the sub control means does not receive the push order instruction number or when there is no push order to be preferentially notified, the sub control means produces an effect transmitted from the main control means. You may make it alert | report a pushing order based on a group number or a combination determination result number.

  In the above embodiment, one terminal (terminal PI0) is used to determine whether the test specification or the mass production specification, but a plurality of terminals may be used. Moreover, the aspects of each embodiment and each modified example described above can be used in appropriate combination.

<< Third Embodiment >>
Next, regarding the slot machine according to the third embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as “slot machine of the third embodiment”), specifically, the lighting timing of a plurality of display lamps when a re-playing combination is established, FIG. 56 to 60 will be described with additional reference. The slot machine according to the third embodiment includes a replay lamp, a 1BET lamp, a 2BET lamp, a 3BET lamp, a start lamp, and a medal insertion ready lamp as display lamps configured by LED lamps.

  The replay lamp is displayed when the symbol combination (also referred to as “replay symbol”) corresponding to the replay game (replay symbol (also referred to as “replay symbol”) in the previous game is stopped and displayed on the active line. , A game that can be executed without betting game medals held by the player), and corresponds to the above-mentioned re-game display lamp 46e. The 1BET lamp is a lamp that indicates that the number of bets of game medals is 1 or more, and corresponds to the above-described 1-BET display lamp 46bA. The 2BET lamp is a lamp indicating that the bet number of game medals is 2 or more, and corresponds to the above-described 2-BET display lamp 46bB. The 3BET lamp is a lamp indicating that the number of game medals bet is 3, and corresponds to the above-described MAX-BET display lamp 46b. The start lamp is a lamp indicating that the start lever operation can be started (a state in which a game can be started by operating the start lever), and corresponds to the above-described game start display lamp 46d. The medal insertion enable lamp is a lamp indicating that a game medal can be inserted, and corresponds to the above-described insertion enable display lamp 46c.

  When a re-game is established (when a replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line), the next game becomes a replay game, and the same number of game medals as the number of bets in the previous game are bet by automatic bet processing. . In replay games, the player does not need to bet a game medal by himself (it cannot bet by himself), so if a role other than replay is established in the previous game or if it is lost, The operation procedure performed by the person is greatly different. Therefore, if the current game is a replay game and it is difficult for the player to understand that a game medal is automatically betted, the player may be confused. Therefore, at the time of replay game, it is important to turn on the replay lamp, 1BET lamp, 2BET lamp, 3BET lamp, start lamp, and medal insertion ready lamp for smooth game play. .

  56 to 60 exemplify ten patterns regarding the lighting timing of these display lamps, and these will be sequentially described below. In any pattern, the previous game is not a replay game, and the number of bets in the previous game is “3”. In addition, it is assumed that after the replay symbol is displayed, the third stop switch (stop switch in which the third stop operation has been performed) has been switched from the on state to the off state (the hand has moved away from the third stop switch). . 56 to 60, the timing when the replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line as the timing that can be switched between the lighting state and the non-lighting state of each display lamp (indicated as “when the replay symbol is displayed” in the figure). When the third stop switch is switched from the on state to the off state (indicated as “when the third stop switch is off” in the figure), and the state where the game can be started by operating the start lever (operation of the start lever) The three timings at the point of time (when “start lever operation can be started” in the figure) are shown. In the following description, for convenience, the period from the time when the replay symbol is displayed until the start lever operation can be started is referred to as the “replay game preparation period”. The period is referred to as “replay game preparation first half period”, and the period from when the third stop switch is turned off until start lever operation can be started is referred to as “replay game preparation second half period”. Note that the length of the horizontal axis (distance between each time point) in each of the timing patterns 1 to 10 does not accurately represent the actual time.

  In the lighting timing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 56A, the replay lamp, the start lamp, and the medal insertion enable lamp are in a non-lighting state during a predetermined period before the replay symbol display, and the 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp are The lighting state is set (this is the same in the other lighting timing patterns 2 to 10). When the replay symbol is displayed, immediately after (substantially simultaneously), the replay lamp is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state, and the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state. On the other hand, the 1BET lamp remains lit, and the start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp remain unlit. The 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp that are switched from the lit state to the non-lit state after the replay symbol is displayed will be displayed after the 2BET lamp is unlit in the period until the third stop switch is turned off (the first half of the replay game preparation period). Then, the 3BET lamp is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state.

  During the period from when the third stop switch is turned off to when the start lever operation can be started (the second half of the replay game preparation period), there is no change in the lighting / non-lighting state of each display lamp. That is, the replay lamp, the 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp that are lit when the third stop switch is off remain lit during the second half of the replay game preparation, and are not lit when the third stop switch is off. The start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp are not lit during the second half of the replay game preparation period. At the time when the start lever operation can be started, the start lamp switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state, but there is no change in the lighting / non-lighting state of the other display lamps. In this lighting timing pattern 1, the medal insertion enabling lamp is maintained in the non-lighting state even after the start lever operation startable time has elapsed. This is because during the replay game period, even if the number of stored game medals has not reached the upper limit, the game medals cannot be inserted. Even returned. In the case where the medal can be inserted even during the replay game, the medal insertion enable lamp may be switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state simultaneously with the start lamp.

  Thus, in the lighting timing pattern 1, within the replay game preparation period (not including both end points of the period, that is, when the replay symbol is displayed and when the start lever operation can be started, both end points are included or either one of them is included. The end point may be included), and the 1BET lamp is maintained in the lighting state over the period before and after that. Further, the replay lamp is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state prior to the start lamp. Furthermore, the replay lamp is not included in the first half of the replay game preparation period (not including both end points of the period, that is, when the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is off, but including both end points or one of the end points. It is turned on before the 2BET lamp, the 3BET lamp, and the medal insertion enable lamp (switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state). In addition, the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are temporarily turned off at the same time immediately after the replay symbol display (switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state), and then sequentially switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state within the first half of the replay game preparation period. It is like that. Further, immediately after the replay symbol display, the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are temporarily turned off at the same time as the replay lamp is turned on.

  In the lighting timing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 56 (B), the replay lamp is not lit until before the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol is displayed, after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off. The state is maintained and immediately before the start lever operation can be started, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp are kept in the lit state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp are kept off until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display, when the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. When the medal insertion enable lamp is lit, a game medal can be inserted. This is because, even during the replay game, if the number of stored game medals has not reached the upper limit, the game medal can be inserted. Is added to the stored number (returned after reaching the upper limit of the stored number) (same in the lighting timing patterns 3 to 10 below).

  In the lighting timing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 57 (A), the replay lamp remains in the non-lighted state from when the replay symbol is displayed until when the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off. When the start lever operation can be started, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp are kept in the lit state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp are kept off until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display, when the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time (at the same time as the replay lamp), the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 57 (B), the replay lamp is maintained in the non-lighted state for the first half of the replay game preparation from before the replay symbol display time, and within the second half of the replay game preparation (period It does not include both end points, that is, when the third stop switch is turned off and when the start lever operation can be started, but includes both end points or may include either one of the end points (for example, the third point Immediately after the stop switch is turned off), the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp is maintained in the lit state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are temporarily turned off at the same time during the second half of the replay game preparation (after the replay lamp is lit) (switched from the lit state to the non-lighted state). The 3BET lamp is lit up when the start lever operation can be started. The replay lamp is inserted before the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off (switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state) and the 2BET lamp, the 3BET lamp, the start lamp, and the medal are inserted in the second half of the replay game preparation. The lamp is lit before the enabling lamp is lit (switched from the non-lit state to the lit state). The start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp are kept off until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display, when the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time (simultaneously with the 3BET lamp), the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58 (A), the 1BET lamp, 2BET lamp, and 3BET lamp continue to be lit for the first half of the replay game preparation from before the replay symbol display, , Immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the 1 BET lamp and the 2 BET lamp are simultaneously turned on (or 1 BET) until the start lever operation can be started. The lamp is turned on slightly earlier than the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp is turned on when the start lever operation can be started. The replay lamp is maintained in the non-lighted state for the first half of the replay game preparation period from the time when the replay symbol is displayed, and simultaneously with the lighting of the 1BET lamp and the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp during the second half of the replay game preparation period The lamp lights up before the start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp (switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state). The start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp are kept off until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display, when the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time (simultaneously with the 3BET lamp), the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 6 shown in FIG. 58 (B), the 1BET lamp is kept in the lighting state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the period. The 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp continue to be lit for the first half of the replay game preparation period from before the replay symbol display time, and at a predetermined timing within the second half of the replay game preparation period (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), At the same time, the lamp is once turned off (switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state), and then relighted in the order of the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp until the start lever operation can be started. The replay lamp is maintained in a non-lighted state for the first half of the replay game preparation period from the time when the replay symbol is displayed, and at the same time as the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off, and the 2BET lamp during the second half of the replay game preparation period. The 3BET lamp, the start lamp, and the medal insertion enable lamp are lit before relighting (the light is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state).

  In the lighting timing pattern 7 shown in FIG. 59 (A), the replay lamp remains in the non-lighted state from when the replay symbol is displayed until when the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off. When the start lever operation can be started, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp are kept in the lit state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp are kept off until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display, when the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time (at the same time as the replay lamp), the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 8 shown in FIG. 59 (B), the 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp continue to light for the first half of the replay game preparation from the time before the replay symbol display, At the same time (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the light is turned off at the same time (switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state), and then turned on simultaneously when the start lever operation can be started. The replay lamp is maintained in a non-lighted state from the time when the replay symbol is displayed until the first half of the replay game preparation period and the second half of the replay game preparation period. It is lit at the same time as the lamp is lit (switches from the non-lit state to the lit state). The start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp are kept off until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display, when the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, both the replay lamp, the 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp are switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 9 shown in FIG. 60 (A), the replay lamp is maintained in the non-lighted state for the first half of the replay game preparation from the time when the replay symbol is displayed. At the timing (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp is maintained in the lit state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off at the same time (for example, immediately after the replay lamp is turned on) in the second half of the replay game preparation period (switched from the lit state to the non-lit state), and then the start lever operation can be started. Until it becomes, it lights up in order of 2BET lamp and 3BET lamp. The replay lamp is inserted before the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off (switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state) and the 2BET lamp, the 3BET lamp, the start lamp, and the medal are inserted in the second half of the replay game preparation. The lamp is lit before the enabling lamp is lit (switched from the non-lit state to the lit state). The start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp are kept off until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display, when the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 10 shown in FIG. 60 (B), the replay lamp is maintained in a non-lighted state for the first half of the replay game preparation period from before the replay symbol display time, At the timing (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp are kept in the lit state during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period. The start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp are kept off until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display, when the replay symbol is displayed and when the third stop switch is turned off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, the non-lighting state is switched to the lighting state. Note that the replay lamp is lit before the start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp are lit during the second half of the replay game preparation (switches from the non-lit state to the lit state).

  A difference in effect is caused by a difference in lighting timing pattern. Hereinafter, this point will be described. In the case of a pattern in which the start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp are turned on at the same time (lighting timing patterns 2 to 10 are applicable), if the start lamp is turned on before the medal insertion enable lamp, the player wants to insert a game medal. Even if you are thinking, there is a possibility that you can misunderstand that the start lamp can not be inserted because it lights up first, and conversely, if you turn on the medal insertion ready lamp before the start lamp, you can not operate the start lever There is a risk of misunderstanding. Therefore, by simultaneously lighting the start lamp and the medal insertion enable lamp, it becomes possible for the player to make a smooth decision regarding the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever, and the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever can be performed smoothly. Can be performed.

  A pattern in which the 1BET lamp is maintained in the lit state during the replay game preparation period (or during the replay game preparation period and the period before and after it) (lighting timing patterns 1 to 4, 6, 7, 9) , 10), it is easier for the player to know that a re-gamer has been established and an automatic bet has been placed, and it is possible to quickly notify the player that a re-gamer has been established. It is possible to smoothly advance the game. A pattern in which the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are maintained in the lit state throughout the replay game preparation period (or the replay game preparation period and the period before and after the replay game preparation period) If applicable), it will be easier for the player to know that a re-game player has been established and an automatic bet has been placed, and the player can be notified immediately that a re-game player has been established. It becomes possible to proceed smoothly.

  If the replay lamp is a pattern that switches from a non-lighted state to a lighted state before the start lamp (lighting timing patterns 1, 2, 4 to 7, 9, 10 apply), the replay lamp is turned on first. By informing the player that the re-playing role will be established and the replay game will be held first, and then lighting the start lamp, the progress of the game (the start lever can now be operated) Since the player can be notified, the progress of the game can be performed smoothly. When the replay lamp is lit before the medal insertion enable lamp (switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state) (lighting timing patterns 1, 2, 4 to 7, 9, and 10 are applicable), the replay lamp is turned on. By illuminating first, a player can be notified that a re-playing role is established and a replay game will be performed first, and then a medal insertion ready lamp can be lit to allow game medals to be inserted. Since the player can be notified, it is possible for the player to smoothly grasp the game situation.

  When the replay lamp lights up before the 3BET lamp (or 2BET lamp and 3BET lamp) (switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state) (lighting timing patterns 1, 4, 6, 7, and 9 apply) By illuminating the replay lamp first, the player is informed first that the replaying role is established and the replay game will be performed, and then the 3BET lamp (or 2BET lamp and 3BET lamp) is lit. Since it is possible to notify the player that an automatic bet has been made, it is possible to smoothly advance the game. When the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are sequentially switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state (lighting timing patterns 1, 4, 5, 6, and 9 are applicable), the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are lit in stages. This makes it possible to notify the player that the automatic bet has been made more clearly, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

  In the case of a pattern in which the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are temporarily turned off at the same time (switched from a lighting state to a non-lighting state) (lighting timing patterns 1, 4, 5, 6, 8, and 9 apply), many display lamps light Considering that there is a possibility that it will be difficult for the player to grasp the game state if it remains in the state, by turning off the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp at the same time, It is possible to quickly grasp that an automatic bet has been established). If the replay lamp is a pattern that is lit before the 2BET lamp is once extinguished (lighting timing patterns 4 and 9 are applicable), the replay lamp is turned on first, and the replay role is established and replay is performed. By notifying the player that the game will be performed first, and then turning off the 2BET lamp, it is possible to notify the player that the game medals will be automatically betted. It is possible to grasp the situation smoothly.

  If the 2BET lamp (or 2BET lamp and 3BET lamp) is once extinguished at the same time as the replay lamp is turned on (if the lighting timing patterns 1 and 6 are applicable), I would like to notify the player that an automatic bet is placed. In view of the fact that if the 2BET lamp (or 2BET lamp and 3BET lamp) continues to be lit, it may be difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state, the 2BET lamp (or 2BET lamp and 3BET lamp) is By turning off the light, it is possible for the player to quickly grasp the game state. Further, by turning on the replay lamp at the same time, it is possible to notify the player at an early stage that it is not necessary to insert a game medal. In the case of a pattern in which the 3BET lamp and the start lamp are lit at the same time (lighting timing patterns 4, 5, and 8 are applicable), it is possible to quickly notify the player that the start lever can be operated, so that the game proceeds smoothly. Is possible.

  If the previous game is a replay game and the current game is also a replay game, a pattern in which the replay lamp is continuously lit from the previous game to the current game may be adopted. . By continuously lighting the replay lamp, it is possible to quickly notify the player that the re-playing role has been established, so that the game can be smoothly advanced.

  It is also possible to configure another lighting timing pattern by appropriately combining a part of the lighting timing patterns 1 to 10 described above. Each display lamp (replay lamp, 1BET lamp, 2BET lamp, 3BET lamp, start lamp, medal insertion enable lamp) is turned on and off by processing on the main side (main control means side) (for example, timer interrupt processing). The turn-off is controlled (some can be controlled on the sub-side). “Simultaneous” when simultaneously turning on or off a plurality of display lamps includes a case where there is a slight time difference. For example, even if the lighting or extinguishing timing is shifted by several interrupts between a plurality of display lamps, the player cannot determine the timing shift, so there is no problem with simultaneous handling.

<< 4th Embodiment >>
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as “slot machine of the fourth embodiment”), more specifically, regarding the arrangement of electronic components on the control board, refer to FIG. 61 and FIG. While explaining. The slot machine according to the fourth embodiment includes a main control board 600 (corresponding to the main control board 60 described above) for mainly performing control processing related to the progress of the game.

  Various electronic components are mounted on the main control board 600. FIG. 61 shows a planar arrangement relationship of main electronic components mounted on the main control board 600. Specifically, as shown in the drawing, on the main control board 600, a microprocessor MP01 as an IC element having a CPU function, other IC elements IC01 to IC15 having no CPU function, and resistors R01 to R01. R26, collective resistors R31 and R32, capacitors C01 to C05, C11 to C14, and connectors CN01 to CN04 are mounted. On the main control board 600, pad portions P01 and P02 for mounting (soldering) a test IC element (not shown) used in the type test are formed. Note that other electronic components such as diodes and LEDs may be mounted on the main control board 600, but these are not shown.

  The microprocessor MP01 is a one-chip microcomputer in which an IC chip mounted with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. is enclosed in a rectangular parallelepiped package body, and is mounted on the main control board 600 via a socket S01. Has been implemented. The IC elements IC01 to IC15 are general-purpose IC elements configured by enclosing an IC chip on which a plurality of predetermined logic circuits are mounted in a rectangular parallelepiped package body. Resistors R01 to R26 are horizontal type (axial type) resistors configured by enclosing electric resistance elements in a cylindrical package, and the collective resistors R31 and R32 are a plurality of resistors. This is a vertical type (radial type) resistor that is housed in one package. The capacitors C01 to C05 are axial type capacitors, and the capacitors C11 to C14 are larger radial type capacitors than the capacitors C01 to C05. The connectors CN01 to CN04 are electrical components that are joined to a harness-side connector (not shown) for electrically connecting the main control board 600 to another control board or an electric device, and each of the connectors CN01 to CN04 is a plurality of terminals. And a box-shaped housing surrounding the terminal group.

  FIG. 62 shows the height relationship of each electronic component mounted on the main control board 600. As shown in the figure, the height of the microprocessor MP01 (the distance from the surface of the main control board 600 to the top surface of the package body of the microprocessor MP01 installed on the board surface via the socket S01) is H1. When mounted on the main control board 600, the electronic component taller than the height H1 of the microprocessor MP01 is a collective resistor (in FIG. 62, the collective resistor R31 is illustrated, but the others are also the same). ) And a radial type capacitor (in FIG. 62, the capacitor C12 is illustrated, but the others are also the same). All other electronic components are shorter than the height H1 of the microprocessor MP01 (in FIG. 62, only the axial resistor R12, the IC element IC12, and the connector CN03 are illustrated, but other axial types are illustrated. The same applies to resistors, IC elements, connectors, and axial type capacitors).

<Direction of microprocessor and other IC elements>
As shown in FIG. 61, many IC elements IC01 to IC15 are mounted on the main control board 600. A circuit connected to each terminal of each IC element is formed on the main control board 600. If the mounting position (orientation) of the IC element is wrongly mounted, the main control board 600 does not function normally. Therefore, when mounting the IC element, the mounting direction of the IC element is grasped with reference to the position of the first pin 1P of the IC element, and the position on the main control board 600 where the first pin 1P is connected is determined. Mounting work may be performed while checking. On the other hand, if the mounting direction of a large number of IC elements (the position of the first pin 1P at the time of mounting) is different for each IC element, it will take time to confirm the mounting direction of each IC element, and work efficiency will be reduced. End up.

  Therefore, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, the mounting directions of the respective IC elements are aligned according to the mounting direction of the microprocessor MP01 on the main control board 600. Specifically, the microprocessor MP01 has a direction in which the long side direction (the long side direction of the upper surface of the package body) coincides with the horizontal direction (the direction of one side (long side in this example)) of the main control board 600 ( (Hereinafter referred to as “sideways”), and the first pin 1P of the housing terminal is mounted in the lower left position in the figure. IC elements IC01 to IC13 are mounted in a direction in which the long side direction (long side direction of the upper surface of the package body) coincides with the horizontal direction in the figure (horizontal direction), and the long side direction in the figure is the vertical direction (main control There are IC14 and IC15 mounted in a direction (hereinafter referred to as “vertical direction”) that coincides with the other side of the substrate 600 (the direction of the short side in this example). Of these, IC01 to IC13 mounted sideways are mounted with their respective first pins 1P positioned at the lower left in the figure, like the microprocessor MP01. On the other hand, the ICs 14 and 15 mounted in the vertical direction are each mounted with the first pin 1P positioned at the upper left in the figure.

  As described above, in the slot machine of the fourth form, the positions of the respective first pins 1P are aligned for the microprocessor MP01 and the IC elements IC01 to IC13 mounted in the same horizontal direction on the main control board 600 (both are all). (It is in the lower left position in the figure). Therefore, when mounting the IC elements IC01 to IC13, it becomes easy to confirm the mounting direction, so that mounting errors can be reduced and work efficiency can be improved. In this example, the test IC element is also mounted in the horizontal direction with its first pin located at the lower left position in the figure (for the first pin in each pad portion P01, P02). Land portions L1 and L2 are formed at the lower left position in the figure), thereby making it difficult to cause mounting errors.

  In this example, all the horizontal IC elements IC01 to IC13 are configured so that the positions of the respective first pins 1P are aligned. However, some of the horizontal IC elements are mounted in the reverse direction. IC element (the position of the first pin 1P is the upper right in the figure) may be used. In that case, it is preferable that the IC element mounted in the opposite direction has a shape and size that can be easily distinguished from other IC elements from the viewpoint of reducing mounting errors. Further, the substrate surface may be divided into a plurality of regions, and the mounting direction of the IC element may be changed for each region. For example, the board surface is divided into a left area and a right area, and the horizontal IC elements mounted in the left area are arranged so that the positions of the respective first pins are aligned to the lower left. Each IC element mounted in the horizontal direction may be arranged so that the position of each pin 1 is aligned on the upper right.

<Distance between microprocessor and other IC elements>
When current is supplied to the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) installed on the main control board 600, noise may be generated from the IC elements. If such an IC element is installed in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01, noise generated from the IC element may adversely affect the operation of the microprocessor MP01.

  Therefore, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, no IC element is arranged in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01 on the main control board 600. Specifically, in the vicinity region of the microprocessor MP01 (here, a virtual boundary formed at a position separated from the outer periphery of the package body of the microprocessor MP01 by a length W1 in the short side of the top surface of the package body) No IC element is arranged in the area surrounded by the line BL1. Note that W1 is equal to or longer than the length of one axial type resistor (R01 to R26) (the length when mounted).

  As described above, in the slot machine of the fourth form, all of the IC elements IC01 to IC15 mounted on the main control board 600 are longer than the microprocessor MP01 in the direction of the short side of the upper surface of the package body of the microprocessor MP01. The distance W1 is arranged apart. Therefore, even if noise is generated from the IC element, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the noise adversely affects the operation of the microprocessor MP01. Each IC element is preferably arranged apart from the microprocessor MP01 by at least twice the length W1.

<Height of electronic components placed around the microprocessor>
The microprocessor MP01 is automatically mounted on the main control board 600 by an attachment device such as a chip mounter. The attachment device grips the microprocessor MP01 and moves it above the planned attachment position, and then moves the microprocessor MP01 downward to a predetermined height and attaches it to the socket S01. If a component that is taller than the height of the microprocessor MP01 (height H1 when mounted) is mounted in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01, it differs from the planned mounting position due to a data input error in the planned mounting position. When the mounting apparatus moves the microprocessor MP01 downward at the position, the microprocessor MP01 and a jig for gripping it may come into contact with a tall component.

  Therefore, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, no taller component than the microprocessor MP01 is arranged in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01 on the main control board 600. Specifically, in the vicinity region of the microprocessor MP01 (in the boundary line BL1 formed at a position separated from the outer periphery of the package body of the microprocessor MP01 by the length W1 in the short side of the upper surface of the package body) In the enclosed area, components taller than the microprocessor MP01 (in this example, the collective resistors R31 and R32 and the radial capacitors C11 to C14) are not arranged. Even in the vicinity region, any component (except for the IC element) shorter than the microprocessor MP01 may be arranged, but these may not be arranged.

  Thus, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, all of the components (collective resistors R31 and R32 and radial capacitors C11 to C14) taller than the microprocessor MP01 are at least from the microprocessor MP01. The package body is spaced apart by a length W1 in the upper side short side direction. Therefore, when the mounting apparatus moves the microprocessor MP01 downward at a position different from the position where the mounting is planned, the microprocessor MP01 and the jig for gripping it come into contact with tall components, and the microprocessor MP01 or It is possible to prevent damage to tall parts.

<< 5th Embodiment >>
Next, with regard to the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as “slot machine of the fifth embodiment”), specifically, a built-in RWM (hereinafter referred to as the main control means 100) of the main control means. A memory map of “RAM” will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64 additionally.
The memory map of such a RAM includes a set value data area, an external signal system data area, a RAM checksum data area, a control command buffer area, a stack pointer temporary storage buffer area when power failure occurs, an unused area, and a save data storage. An area etc. are included.
The unused area means an area that may be used as an area for taking or clearing a checksum value but is not used in a game.

  In a gaming machine, set value data as data used for a winning combination lottery or the like is important for advancing a game. For this reason, when this set value data is stored in the RAM, it is necessary to reliably prevent a state in which it is rewritten for some reason.

  For example, when it becomes necessary to save the program being executed based on the occurrence of an interrupt instruction (save instruction), for example, the stack address is updated (subtracted) and then executed in the save data storage area secured as a stack. Stores the value of the program counter of the middle program (original program). When returning to the original, the stack address is updated (added) after the data is taken out from the saved data storage area indicated by the stack address. As a result, it is possible to store information (return destination address) when returning to the original program to what extent the original program has been executed. In the program processing, if consecutive interrupts occur, in order to return from the deep subroutine hierarchy to the original program, in principle, return addresses are stored in the save data storage area by the number of consecutive interrupts. Since it is necessary, the capacity of the saved data storage area must be at least according to the number of consecutive interrupts. However, the capacity of the save data storage area in such a case is almost fixed at the time of program design (compiler time) (the save data storage area is, for example, several bytes in consideration of the number of normal interrupts) (In FIG. 64, it is common to secure save data 1 to 8 bytes of save data 1), so it is important to set the capacity of the save data storage area appropriately when designing a program. Such a situation that the set value data is rewritten by the return address described above can be normally avoided.

  However, if the program runs out of control for some reason and it becomes impossible to perform the necessary processing procedure, a continuous interrupt instruction may be generated from the watchdog timer (WDT), etc. The area is loaded with information (capacity) corresponding to the number of interrupt instructions. That is, when the stack pointer indicates a stack address that is sequentially subtracted (decremented), the return address is sequentially stored in each save data storage area.

  In such a case, the return address may be accumulated on the stack instantaneously, exceeding the saved data area secured at the time of design and above (the RAM address is 0 address side) The return address of the original program is rewritten up to the RAM storage area (an area in which other data is stored). That is, the data described in the address 0 address side adjacent to the reserved save data area is eroded by the return address, and the data stored in the RAM is lost. The rewritten useless address data causes various undesirable problems when the gaming machine operates.

  In particular, when the set value data area described above is arranged in the RAM address space in the area of the save data area where the address is close to the address 0 side, the set value data has no meaning at all. It is important to reduce the possibility of such a situation to a minimum, because there is a risk that it will be overwritten with no data and it may become impossible to continue the game itself in the gaming machine It becomes.

Therefore, the gaming machine (slot machine) according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention is configured to have the following requirements so that the occurrence of the above-described situation can be reduced to the minimum.
Hereinafter, the typical five patterns of the present embodiment will be described by listing the requirements.

<Pattern 1 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) A storage means (RAM) capable of reading and writing data is provided.
(2) The storage means (RAM) saves at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored, a second storage area that is an unused area, and data necessary for progressing the game. And a third storage area.
(3) The second storage area is set to an address position between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) By setting as in (3) above, even if the number of data saved in the third storage area exceeds the design upper limit, the set value data is difficult to be overwritten.

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of the pattern 1 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 63A, the game proceeds with the first storage area in which the set value data is stored at the address position. By placing the second storage area, which is an unused area, between the above and the third storage area where necessary data is saved, interrupt instructions are generated continuously due to program runaway etc. Even if the return address data exceeds the saved data area reserved at the time of design and erodes and overwrites the area on the smaller address side, the description is first made in the unused area. This is done in a certain second storage area, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the set value data is rewritten to data that does not make any sense. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing a serious trouble in playing the game (or making the game impossible).

<Pattern 2 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) The same requirement as requirement (1) in the gaming machine (slot machine) of the pattern 1 is provided.
(2A) The storage means (RAM) stores at least a first storage area in which setting value data is stored, a second storage area that is an unused area, and data necessary for progressing the game. A third storage area and a fourth storage area for storing predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine.
(3A) The second storage area and the fourth storage area are set to address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) The game machine (slot machine) having the pattern 1 has the same requirement as the requirement (4).

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of the pattern 2 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the game proceeds with the first storage area where the set value data is stored at the address position. A second storage area that is an unused area and a fourth storage area that stores predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine are arranged between the third storage area where necessary data is saved. By doing so, interrupt instructions are generated continuously due to program runaway, etc., and the return address data exceeds the saved data area reserved at the time of design and erodes the area on the smaller address side and overwrites it. Even if it comes to be, the description first stores the second storage area, which is an unused area, and predetermined data that is not directly related to the game of the gaming machine and is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine. 4th Will be made in 憶領 range, it is possible to greatly reduce the possibility that is rewritten to the data setting value data does not make sense at all. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing a serious trouble in playing the game (or making the game impossible).

<Pattern 3 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) The same requirement as requirement (1) in the gaming machine (slot machine) of the pattern 1 is provided.
(2B) The storage means (RAM) stores at least a first storage area in which setting value data is stored, a second storage area that is an unused area, and data necessary for progressing the game. A third storage area and a fifth storage area for storing checksum data of the storage means (RAM).
(3B) The second storage area and the fifth storage area are set to address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) The game machine (slot machine) having the pattern 1 has the same requirement as the requirement (4).

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 3 configured in this way, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the game proceeds with the first storage area in which the set value data is stored at the address position. A second storage area which is an unused area and a fifth storage area for storing checksum data of the storage means (RAM) are arranged between the third storage area where necessary data is saved. By doing so, interrupt instructions are generated continuously due to program runaway, etc., and the return address data exceeds the save data area reserved at the time of design, and the area with the smaller address is overwritten. Even if the storage means (R), the description is first made in the second storage area which is an unused area, and in the game, the storage means (R Will be made in the fifth storage area for storing checksum data of M), it is possible to greatly reduce the possibility that is rewritten to the data setting value data does not make sense at all. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing a serious trouble in playing the game (or making the game impossible).

<Pattern 4 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) The same requirement as requirement (1) in the gaming machine (slot machine) of the pattern 1 is provided.
(2C) The storage means (RAM) saves at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored, a second storage area that is an unused area, and data necessary for progressing the game. And a sixth storage area for storing command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-main control means.
(3C) The second storage area and the sixth storage area are set to address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) The game machine (slot machine) having the pattern 1 has the same requirement as the requirement (4).

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of the pattern 4 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 63D, the game proceeds with the first storage area in which the set value data is stored at the address position. Command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-main control means is saved between the second storage area as an unused area and the third storage area where necessary data is saved. By arranging the sixth storage area, interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to program runaway, etc., and the return address data exceeds the saved data area reserved at the time of design, Even if the area on the smaller side is eroded and overwritten, the description should first apply to the second storage area, which is an unused area, and to the main control that is essential for playing the game. Relevant, the command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-main control means is stored in the sixth storage area, and the set value data is rewritten to data that has no meaning at all. It is possible to greatly reduce the risk of being lost. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing a serious trouble in playing the game (or making the game impossible).

<Pattern 5 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) The same requirement as requirement (1) in the gaming machine (slot machine) of the pattern 1 is provided.
(2D) The storage means (RAM) stores at least a first storage area in which setting value data is stored, a second storage area that is an unused area, and data necessary for progressing the game. And a seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address when a power interruption occurs.
(3D) The second storage area and the seventh storage area are set to address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) The game machine (slot machine) having the pattern 1 has the same requirement as the requirement (4).

According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of the pattern 5 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the game proceeds with the first storage area in which the set value data is stored at the address position. The second storage area that is an unused area and the seventh storage area that stores the stack pointer address when a power interruption occurs are arranged between the third storage area where necessary data is saved. Due to the program runaway, interrupt instructions are generated continuously, and the return address data exceeds the saved data area reserved at the time of design and erodes the area on the smaller address side and is overwritten. Even if it becomes like that, the description will first be the second storage area which is an unused area, and the power failure occurrence which is not substantially used except when power interruption occurs and does not have a significant effect on normal games. It will be made in the seventh storage area for storing a stack pointer address when it is possible to greatly reduce the possibility that is rewritten to the data setting value data does not make sense at all. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing a serious trouble in playing the game (or making the game impossible).
In the memory map described above, the predetermined areas other than the above-described storage areas are areas for storing various important data.

<Preferred Aspects of the above-mentioned Game Machines for Each Pattern>
In the gaming machines having the patterns 1 to 5 described above, one storage area (the fourth storage area) is provided between the first storage area and the third storage area in addition to the second storage area or the second storage area. Storage area, fifth storage area, sixth storage area, or seventh storage area). In the fourth to seventh storage areas, unlike the case of the set value data directly connected to the game of the gaming machine, the data stored in the storage area is overwritten and the contents are changed. The game medal can be inserted, and the game can be continued.

  As shown in FIGS. 63A to 63E, in addition to the second storage area, one provided storage area (fourth storage area, fifth storage area, sixth storage area, and Any of the seventh storage areas) is preferably arranged at an address position closer to the third storage area than an intermediate address position between the first storage area and the third storage area. As a result, the above-described fourth to seventh storage areas are arranged in the address area closer to the third storage area than the intermediate address position between the first storage area and the third storage area. Since the areas other than the fourth to seventh storage areas include the intermediate address position and are arranged in an address area farther from the third storage area than this, interrupt instructions continuously occur due to program runaway etc. Even if the return address data exceeds the saved data area reserved at the time of design and is overwritten by eroding the area on the smaller address side, the fourth to seventh storage areas The possibility of data rewriting in an area other than the above-described fourth to seventh storage areas storing more important data than stored data can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines having the above-described patterns 1 to 5, it is preferable that the second storage area including the unused area is arranged adjacent to the side where the address of the third storage area is small. In the unused area, the data that has already been described is not usually erased. Therefore, the arrangement causes the least problem as compared with the case where the other storage area is adjacent to the third storage area. be able to.

  In addition, in the gaming machines of patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIGS. 63A to 63E, in the RAM address arrangement, the second storage is between the first storage area and the third storage area. In addition to the area or the second storage area, one storage area (any of the fourth storage area, the fifth storage area, the sixth storage area, and the seventh storage area) is provided. Among the fourth to seventh storage areas, any combination of storage areas can be arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area.

  That is, two storage areas may be added in addition to the second storage area. For example, the fourth and fifth storage areas may be arranged, or the fourth and sixth storage areas may be arranged. Alternatively, the fourth and seventh storage areas may be arranged, the fifth and sixth storage areas may be arranged, or the fifth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. However, the sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. Further, the second storage area and the added two storage areas may be arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area in any order.

  In addition to the second storage area, three storage areas may be added. For example, fourth, fifth, and sixth storage areas may be arranged, and the fourth, fifth, and seventh storage areas may be arranged. A storage area may be arranged, the fourth, sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged, or the fifth, sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. Further, the second storage area and the added three storage areas may be arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area in any order.

  Further, in addition to the second storage area, fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. FIG. 64 shows an address map of a RAM in which these second, fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh storage areas are arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area. .

  In the above description, in any aspect, the second storage area is arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area. Of course, the second storage area is arranged. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that does not.

Hereinafter, the aspect shown in FIG. 64 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 64, this RAM is a storage area used as a work area (data area, stack area, etc.) by the user program, and in the mode shown in FIG. 64, the set value is stored in the memory space of 7F00H to 7FFFH. A first storage area for storing set value data that is a number for managing the game, a second storage area as an unused area that is not used for gaming, and save data saved by a CALL instruction, a PUSH instruction, etc. A third storage area that may be stored, a fourth storage area that stores data related to external signal output, and a second storage area that stores checksum data for setting the addition value of the RAM area to 0 5 is a control command buffer for storing command data to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-main control means. Storage area of 6, and the storage area of the seventh is arranged a buffer for storing a stack pointer at the time of power failure occurs until the power returns.
Note that the address of 8000H is a start address of the stack pointer, and is a value one more than 7FFFH, which is the address of the saved data 1 area where data is first saved. Actually, when the program being executed needs to be saved first, the stack pointer is decremented by 1, so that the value of the program counter to be saved is saved in the save data 1 area located at the address of 7FFFH. Stored.

  Specifically, the first storage area for storing the set value data is arranged in the address space of 7F02H, the fourth storage area for storing the external signal output related data is arranged in the address space of 7FC0H, and the checksum data Is stored in the address space of 7FCCEH, and the sixth storage area, which is a control command buffer, is allocated in the address space of 7FD0H to 7FD5H to store the stack pointer (address) at the occurrence of power interruption The seventh storage area, which is a buffer for storing data, is arranged in the address space of 7FE0H, the second storage area as an unused area is arranged in the address space of 7FF7H, and a third storage area in which saved data can be stored is 7FF7H to 7FFFH are arranged in the address space.

  The sixth storage area, which is the control command buffer, is assigned a capacity of 6 bytes, and the third storage area where the saved data can be saved is assigned a capacity of 8 bytes. Other storage areas are allocated a capacity of 1 byte.

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) in which the RAM address space is configured as shown in FIG. 64, the first storage area in which the set value data is saved and the data necessary for the game to be saved are saved. A second storage area that is an unused area, a fourth storage area that stores predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, and a storage means (RAM) A fifth storage area for storing checksum data; a sixth storage area for storing command information for transmission from the main control means to the sub-main control means; and a seventh storage area for storing a stack pointer address when a power failure occurs. In the event that an unexpected situation occurs, the setting value data stored in the first storage area is overwritten with data that has no meaning at all. It can be greatly reduced.

  In other words, an interrupt instruction is generated continuously due to a program runaway, etc., and the return address data exceeds the saved data area reserved at the time of design and erodes and overwrites the area with the smaller address Even if an error occurs, the description will first be the second storage area that is an unused area, and then the power interruption that will not be substantially used except when a power interruption occurs and will not have a significant effect on normal games. A seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address at the time of occurrence, and then storing command information for transmission from the main control means to the sub-main control means, which is not directly related to the main control means essential for playing a game A sixth storage area for storing checksum data in storage means (RAM) that is not substantially used after the first processing such as when the power is turned on in the game. In addition, the setting value data is rewritten to data that does not make any sense at all, in the fourth storage area that stores predetermined data that is not directly related to the game and is transmitted directly to the outside of the gaming machine. It is possible to greatly reduce the risk of being lost.

  This can greatly reduce the possibility that it will be impossible to play a game on the gaming machine. In particular, an unused area is arranged at a position closest to the third storage area, and even if unnecessary return address data is written in this unused area, there is no possibility that the data is overwritten. It is a highly secure arrangement.

  In the mode shown in FIG. 64, the first storage area is between the first storage area in which the set value data is stored and the third storage area in which data necessary for proceeding with the game is saved. In order from the area side, a fourth storage area for storing predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, a fifth storage area for storing checksum data in the storage means (RAM), and a sub-main from the main control means A sixth storage area for storing command information to be transmitted to the control means, a seventh storage area for storing a stack pointer address when a power interruption occurs, and a second storage area that is an unused area are arranged. However, the arrangement of these storage areas is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 64, and can be arranged in any order.

  For example, a fourth storage area is arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area at a position closest to the first storage area among the five storage areas, and the other fifth storage areas are arranged. The storage area, the sixth storage area, the seventh storage area, and the second storage area can be changed and arranged in any order. In these arrangements, since the fourth storage area is arranged closest to the first storage area, it is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine together with the set value data stored in the first storage area. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the data stored in the fourth storage area for storing the predetermined data is rewritten to data that does not make any sense. Thereby, the predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine can be correct, and accurate information can be transmitted to the hall manager or the like.

  For example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, among the five storage areas, the fifth storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area, It is possible to change and arrange the fourth storage area, the sixth storage area, the seventh storage area, and the second storage area in any order. In these arrangements, since the fifth storage area for storing the checksum data of the storage means (RAM) is arranged on the most first storage area side, the settings stored in the first storage area It is possible to reduce the possibility that the data stored in the fifth storage area for storing the checksum data of the storage means (RAM) together with the value data is rewritten to data that does not make any sense. As a result, the checksum data in the storage means (RAM) can be made correct, and the data value in the storage means (RAM) can be confirmed satisfactorily.

  Further, for example, a sixth storage area is arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area at a position closest to the first storage area among the five storage areas, and the other It is possible to change and arrange the fourth storage area, the fifth storage area, the seventh storage area, and the second storage area in any order. In these arrangements, since the sixth storage area for storing command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub main control means is arranged on the most first storage area side, the first storage area The data stored in the sixth storage area for storing the command information for transmission to the sub-main control means together with the set value data stored in the data may be rewritten to data that does not make any sense. Can be reduced. As a result, the command information to be transmitted to the sub-main control means can be correct, and the effect processing performed using the sub-main control means can be improved.

  Further, for example, a seventh storage area is arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area at a position closest to the first storage area among the five storage areas, It is possible to change and arrange the fourth storage area, the fifth storage area, the sixth storage area, and the second storage area in any order. In these arrangements, since the seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address when power interruption occurs is arranged on the most first storage area side, the set value data stored in the first storage area At the same time, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the stack pointer address stored in the seventh storage area is rewritten to data that does not make any sense. As a result, the stack pointer address can be held at a correct value until the power failure is restored, and the original program can be continuously processed without any trouble.

  Of course, the second storage area (unused area) is arranged closest to the first storage area between the first storage area and the third storage area, and the other fourth storage areas. The fifth storage area, the sixth storage area, and the seventh storage area can be changed and arranged in any order.

  The memory space allocated to the built-in RAM may be configured to be continuous with the memory space of the built-in ROM for storing user programs and data, as shown in FIG. That is, the main control unit of the gaming machine can be constituted by the built-in ROM assigned to the memory space at addresses 0000H to 7DFFH and the built-in RAM assigned to the memory space at addresses 7F00H to 7FFFH.

<< 6th Embodiment >>
Next, regarding the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as “slot machine of the sixth embodiment”), specifically, during rotation of the reel (also referred to as “rotating cylinder”), rotation failure or power interruption. The control process when this occurs will be described with additional reference to FIGS. In the slot machine of the sixth embodiment, three reels (corresponding to the above-described reels 3a, 3b, and 3c) and three stepping motors that rotate each reel (the above-described stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c) The rotation of the reel is controlled by switching the excitation phase of the stepping motor.

  First, an outline of reel control will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the stepping motor has four phases (φ0, φ1, φ2, φ3), and at the time of acceleration and constant speed, the 1-2 excitation method (φ0, φ0 · φ1, φ1, φ1, φ2, φ2, It is controlled by a method of switching eight excitation phase steps of φ2, φ3, φ3, φ3, and φ0 sequentially, and at the time of deceleration, it is controlled by a deceleration method that excites all phases of φ0 to φ3 (stepping motor The configuration and control method can be changed as appropriate). Further, switching of the excitation phase is performed in an interrupt process (corresponding to the timer interrupt process described above) executed every predetermined time (for example, 1.5 milliseconds).

  As shown in FIG. 65, when a turning cylinder start operation (start lever operation) is accepted, an acceleration state process (process of rotating the rotating cylinder while accelerating until a predetermined rotation speed) is triggered. Is executed. In the acceleration state process, as shown in the figure, the excitation phase switching of the first step is performed when the number of executions of the interrupt process (also referred to as “interrupt count”) reaches 100 from the start time. After that, when the interrupt count is 50, the second phase excitation phase switching is performed, and when the interrupt count is 10, 5, and 2, the excitation phase switching is performed for the third, fourth, and fifth steps. . Then, at the time of execution of the interrupt process next to the interrupt process in which the fifth step excitation phase switching is performed (when the number of interrupts is 1), the sixth step excitation phase switching is performed, and the acceleration state process ( The excitation switching from the first step to the sixth step) is completed (the value of the number of interruptions that determines the excitation phase switching timing can be changed as appropriate).

  When the acceleration state process ends, a constant speed state process (a process of rotating the rotating drum at a constant speed) is executed. In the constant speed state process, the excitation phase is switched every time the interrupt process is executed (the number of interrupts is 1). When a rotating cylinder stop operation (operation of a stop switch for stopping the rotating cylinder) is received during execution of the constant speed state process, the planned rotation stop position (deceleration state described later) is determined according to the received timing. The position at which the process is to be started is determined, and a deceleration start process for rotating (sliding) the rotating cylinder at a constant speed is executed until the rotating cylinder moves to the planned stop position. When the rotating cylinder moves to the planned stop position, a deceleration state process (a process of stopping the rotating cylinder while decelerating) is executed. In the deceleration state process, all phases φ0 to φ3 are excited while the stop symbol interruption process is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times).

  Next, a control process when a reel rotation failure occurs during the rotating constant speed state or the rotating acceleration state will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 66 (A) to 66 (C). Each flowchart describes not only the processing content but also the state of the slot machine. FIG. 66 (A) shows a processing procedure when a rotation failure of the reel occurs during the rotating cylinder constant speed state. In this case, when a turning start operation is accepted (J11), the state shifts to a turning acceleration state (a state in which acceleration state processing can be executed) (J12), and acceleration state processing is executed (J13). . When this acceleration state process is completed (J14), the process shifts to a rotating cylinder constant speed state (a state in which the constant speed state process can be executed) (J15), and the constant speed state process is executed (J16). During the execution of the constant speed state process, a rotating cylinder rotation failure occurs (J17), and when the rotation failure is detected (J18), re-acceleration for normally rotating the rotating cylinder at a constant speed is started ( J19).

  FIG. 66 (B) shows a processing procedure when a rotation failure of the reel occurs during the rotating cylinder acceleration state. In this case, when a turning start operation is accepted (J11), the state shifts to a turning acceleration state (J12), and acceleration state processing is executed (J13). Even if the rotation rotation failure occurs during the execution of the acceleration state process (J133), the unprocessed acceleration state process (the process of the unexecuted portion of the entire process of the acceleration state process) is executed as scheduled (J134). Then, the acceleration state process is terminated (J14). Thereafter, the state changes to the rotating cylinder constant speed state (J15), and the rotating cylinder constant speed state is executed (J16). If a rotation failure of the rotating drum is detected during the execution of the constant speed state process (J18), reacceleration is started (J19). In the re-acceleration, the same processing as the above-described acceleration state processing may be performed, or a re-acceleration state processing having a content different from the acceleration state processing is separately defined and the re-acceleration state processing is performed. May be.

  When a rotating cylinder rotation failure occurs during the execution of the acceleration state process, it is also possible to detect the rotation failure and perform re-acceleration. However, the rotation failure may be eliminated by executing the unprocessed acceleration state process as scheduled. Therefore, in this example, even if a rotating cylinder rotation failure occurs during execution of acceleration state processing, re-acceleration is not performed (rotation failure detection may or may not be performed), while constant speed state processing is performed. Re-acceleration is performed when a rotation failure is detected. By doing this, if the rotation failure is resolved by executing the unprocessed acceleration state process as scheduled, it is not necessary to execute re-acceleration, so the game can proceed smoothly. It becomes. In addition, the control process during the acceleration state process can be simplified (for example, even if a rotating cylinder rotation failure occurs, re-acceleration is not performed, and rotation failure detection is not performed). The amount of data can be reduced.

  FIG. 66C shows a processing procedure in the case where a power failure occurs during the rotating cylinder acceleration state, thereby causing a reel rotation failure. In this case, when a turning start operation is accepted (J11), the state shifts to a turning acceleration state (J12), and acceleration state processing is executed (J13). Even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the acceleration state process (J131) and a rotating cylinder rotation failure occurs after the power supply is restored (J132) (J133), the unprocessed acceleration state process is executed as scheduled ( J134), the acceleration state process is terminated (J14). Thereafter, the state changes to the rotating cylinder constant speed state (J15), and the rotating cylinder constant speed state is executed (J16). If a rotation failure of the rotating drum is detected during the execution of the constant speed state process (J18), reacceleration is started (J19).

  In the case of this example, even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the acceleration state process, and thus a rotating rotation failure occurs, re-acceleration is not performed (detection of rotation failure may or may not be performed). ) When a rotation failure is detected during execution of the constant speed state process, re-acceleration is performed. By doing this, if the rotation failure is resolved by executing the unprocessed acceleration state process as scheduled, it is not necessary to execute re-acceleration, so the game can proceed smoothly. It becomes. In addition, since the control process during the acceleration state process can be simplified (for example, even if a rotating cylinder rotation failure occurs due to a power interruption, re-acceleration is not performed and rotation failure detection is not performed). It is possible to reduce the data amount of the control program.

  For example, the rotation failure of the rotating drum is detected as follows. Here, when the rotating drum is rotating normally, the rotating drum rotates once when the stepping motor switches the excitation phase by 336 steps. In this case, when the spinning cylinder is in a constant speed state, one step is performed for each interrupt, so if the spinning cylinder is rotating normally, the spinning cylinder rotates once by 336 interruption. Therefore, the number of interruptions is counted, and when the rotating cylinder makes one rotation, the count value is cleared, and counting of the number of interruptions is started again. Whether or not the rotating cylinder has made one rotation is detected by an index sensor arranged in the vicinity of the rotating cylinder (that is, the count value of the number of interruptions is cleared when detected by the index sensor). In this way, when the rotating cylinder is in a constant speed state, the rotating cylinder should be rotated once (detected by the index sensor) when the number of interruptions (count value) becomes 336. Accordingly, if there is no detection by the index sensor even when the number of interruptions exceeds 336, it may be determined that a rotation failure has occurred. However, if it is immediately determined that the rotation is poor when the number of interruptions exceeds 336, the number of cases where rotation is determined to be poor may increase and the reel control may be delayed. In this example, with a margin, When the number of interruptions reaches 400 (the number can be changed as appropriate), it is determined that the rotation is defective.

  Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 67A to 67C, the control processing when a winning combination that is always established regardless of the pressing order and the pressing position (hereinafter also referred to as “winning confirmed combination”) is won. explain. Each flowchart describes not only the processing content but also the state of the slot machine. FIG. 67 (A) shows a processing procedure in a case where all the spinning cylinders are normally stopped after winning winning combination winning combination.

  In this case, when the winning combination is won (J31), and the rotation of the rotating cylinder is started (J32), the rotation shifts to the rotating cylinder constant speed state (J33), and the constant speed state process is executed (J34). Thereafter, the operation proceeds to a stop operation accepting state (a state in which all cylinders are in a constant speed rotation state and a stop switch operation can be accepted) (J35). When the first stop operation is accepted (J36), the first time The winning combination symbol (corresponding symbol of the winning combination) is stopped and displayed on the active line on the trunk (the rotating cylinder stopped by the first stop operation) (J37). After that, when the second stop operation is accepted (J38), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line in the second cylinder (the cylinder stopped by the second stop operation) (J39). Furthermore, when the third stop operation is accepted (J40), the process shifts to a rotation decelerable state (a state in which the deceleration start process and the subsequent deceleration state process can be performed) (J41). Thereafter, the deceleration start process is executed to move the third cylinder (the cylinder stopped by the third stop operation) to the planned stop position (J42), and the deceleration state process is further executed in the third cylinder. The winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line (J43). Then, after confirming the stop of all-rounding (J44), payout of game medals is started (J45).

  FIG. 67B shows a processing procedure in the case where a power failure occurs after acceptance of the third stop operation. In this case, when the winning combination is won (J31), and the rotation of the rotating cylinder is started (J32), the rotation shifts to the rotating cylinder constant speed state (J33), and the constant speed state process is executed (J34). Thereafter, the state shifts to a stop operation acceptable state (J35), and when the first stop operation is accepted (J36), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line in the first cylinder (J37). Thereafter, when the second stop operation is accepted (J38), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line in the second round (J39). Further, when the third stop operation is received (J40), the state shifts to the rotating cylinder stop state (J41). Thereafter, even if the power is cut off (J411), the deceleration start process is executed to move the third cylinder to the planned stop position (J42), and the deceleration state process is executed. Thereafter, power-off processing is executed (J421), and the power is restored (J422). Since the deceleration start process and the deceleration state process are executed before the power-off process is executed, the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line in the third cylinder (J43), and the entire cylinder stop (J44) is performed. After confirming (), payout of game medals is started (J45).

  In the case of this example, even if the power is cut off after the third stop operation is accepted, the third cylinder is moved to the planned stop position, and the winning symbol can be stopped and displayed on the active line. (Even if a power interruption occurs, power is supplied at a level that can control the rotating drum for a predetermined period (a power level that is not detected as a power interruption), and the deceleration start process and the deceleration state process are normally executed within the predetermined period. Is possible configuration). Therefore, even if the power is cut off after the third stop operation is accepted, the winning symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the game medals can be paid out immediately after the power is restored, the game can be smoothly advanced.

  FIG. 67 (C) shows a processing procedure in the case where a rotation failure occurs after receiving the third stop operation. In this case, when the winning combination is won (J31), and the rotation of the rotating cylinder is started (J32), the rotation shifts to the rotating cylinder constant speed state (J33), and the constant speed state process is executed (J34). Thereafter, the state shifts to a stop operation acceptable state (J35), and when the first stop operation is accepted (J36), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line in the first cylinder (J37). Thereafter, when the second stop operation is accepted (J38), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line in the second round (J39). Further, when the third stop operation is received (J40), the state shifts to the rotating cylinder stop state (J41). Thereafter, a rotation failure occurs in the third cylinder (J415), so that the deceleration start process and the deceleration state process cannot be normally executed, and the third cylinder can be moved to the planned stop position. (J416), the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line in the third round (J417). However, after confirming the stop of all-rounding (J44), payout of game medals starts (J45).

  In the case of this example, even if the spinning cylinder rotation failure has occurred after the third stop operation has been accepted, even if the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line in the third spinning cylinder, the game medal is paid out. Is supposed to do. This is because when the third stop operation is accepted, it is internally determined that the winning combination will be established, but the winning combination symbol is not stopped and displayed on the active line in the third cylinder. In other words, it is considered that if the game medal is not paid out, the player will be unfairly disadvantaged. For this reason, if there is no problem in program control, even if the actual stop position is shifted due to an external factor, the display determination is made as if the winning symbols are complete, and the player is benefited. As in this example, if the winning combination is confirmed even if the winning combination is not established, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by paying out the game medal, In addition, the game can proceed smoothly. In this example, the case where a winning combination combination is won is described as an example, but the same control can be performed even when a combination other than a winning combination combination is won. For example, if a winning combination that is established depending on the pressing order or the pressing position is won, and it is internally determined that the winning combination will be established when the third stop operation is received, then a rotation failure will occur. Even if it is generated and the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line, the game medal may be paid out. On the other hand, when it is determined internally that the winning combination will not be established at the time when the third stop operation is accepted, but the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line due to a rotation failure thereafter. The game medals may not be paid out. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the player from unfairly obtaining profits that cannot be obtained originally.

  In the example shown in FIG. 67 (B), even if the power is cut off after the third stop operation is accepted, the third cylinder is moved to the planned stop position and the winning combination symbol is placed on the active line. It is configured to be able to stop display. On the other hand, depending on the timing at which the power is cut off, the winning combination symbol may not be stopped and displayed on the active line in the third cylinder. Even in such a configuration, if it is determined internally that a winning combination will be established at the time of accepting the third stop operation, the power-off will occur after that and the winning combination symbol will be valid. It is preferable that the game medal be paid out even if it cannot be stopped and displayed on the line.

  Further, when a power interruption or rotation failure occurs after receiving the third stop operation, an error notification may be performed. This error notification may be made whenever a power failure or rotation failure occurs, or an error occurs when a game medal is paid out (when the winning combination is confirmed internally). If no notification is made and no game medal is paid out (in the case where a winning combination is not established internally), an error notification may be given. If the error notification is necessarily performed, the number of times of determining whether or not to perform error notification can be reduced, so that the control program can be simplified. If a configuration is adopted in which error notification is not performed when paying out game medals, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted by error notification, so that the game can proceed smoothly. If a game medal is not paid out, an error notification is made, so that even if a winning combination symbol that should not have been stopped on the active line is stopped due to power failure or rotation failure, Since it is easy for the player to understand that this is due to an error, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the fact that the game medal is not paid out even though the winning combination symbols are available. It becomes possible.

  In the above description, the case where the power interruption or the rotation failure occurs after accepting the third stop operation has been described. However, the case where the power interruption or the rotation failure occurs after accepting the first stop operation or the second stop operation. Can be configured similarly. For example, even if a power failure or rotation failure occurs after the second stop operation is accepted, and the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line in the second cylinder, the first stop before the power failure When the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line in the first cylinder and the third cylinder by the third stop operation after the operation and the power return, the game medal may be paid out. Similarly, even if the power interruption or rotation failure occurs after the first stop operation is accepted, and the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line in the first cylinder, the second after the power is restored. When the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line in the second and third cylinders by the stop operation and the third stop operation, the game medals may be paid out.

<< 7th Embodiment >>
Next, regarding the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as “slot machine of the seventh embodiment”), specifically, the setting of the winning count and the winning rate of the re-gamer and the setting of the bonus game 68 to 71 will be described with additional reference.

  The payout rate in a slot machine is based on the total number of game media (also referred to as “total bets”) placed (betted) in the slot machine to play those games after a predetermined number of games. The ratio of the total number of game media paid out from the slot machine as a result of this game (also referred to as “total payout number”). The higher the play rate, the more advantageous for the player and the higher the profit, while the disadvantage for the amusement hall and the lower the operating profit. On the contrary, the lower the payout rate, the more disadvantageous for the player, and there is a possibility that a significantly disadvantageous state may occur, while the advantageous for the amusement hall will increase and the operating profit will increase. For this reason, how to set the payout rate is important in designing the slot machine (determining specifications).

  In the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment, the number of re-games won is shown in the middle column of FIG. As a result, the payout rate is set to be within the numerical range shown in the right column of FIG. 68. In FIG. 68, the number of winning redesigned game players when playing 400 times, 1600 times, 6000 times, and 17500 times is indicated by P1, P2, P3, and P4, respectively. The design payout rates are indicated by Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4, respectively. The payout rate (Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4) is calculated by dividing the total number of payouts when playing a predetermined number of games by the total number of bets. Further, the bet number of the next game when the re-game combination is established is calculated as 0.

  Further, the following two methods are known as a simulation method for verifying the design payout rate. The first method is a method for calculating a payout rate based on a game result when the spinning cylinder is stopped in an arbitrary pressing order and an arbitrary pressing position in all the predetermined number of games. The second method is a method of calculating a payout rate based on a game result in a case where all winning combinations are established in the game in all the predetermined number of games. In both methods, when a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 6) are provided for the winning probability of the winning combination, all the setting values are verified, and a bet is made in one game. When the number of game media that can be played can be changed (for example, 1 bet, 2 bets, 3 bets), verification is performed for all bet numbers. In the slot machine of the seventh embodiment, the payout rate is set to be within the numerical range shown in FIG. 68 by design, regardless of which method is used for design.

  Hereinafter, the contents shown in FIG. 68 will be individually described. The lower limit when 400 games are played is set so that the re-game player is elected at least 54 times (54 ≦ P1) by design. It is set to exceed 1/3 (1/3 <Q1). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, as a result of playing the game 400 times, there is a risk that the player will be in a significantly disadvantageous state, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. In addition, when the number of games played is less than 1/3 at a stage where the number of games is less than 400 times, the player will play up to 400 times and try to recover even a little. As a game arcade, there will be more opportunities for players to play at least 400 games, increasing the availability of slot machines and securing a certain profit. It becomes easy.

  The upper limit when 400 games are played is set so that the re-gamer wins in the range not exceeding 300 times (P1 ≦ 300) by design. The rate is set to be below 2.2 (Q1 <2.2). If the upper limit of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a risk that the gaming place will be significantly disadvantaged as a result of 400 games, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. In addition, when the game play rate is less than 2.2 at the stage where the number of games is less than 400 times, the player can play up to 400 times and recover even a little (profit) As a game arcade, there will be more opportunities for players to play at least 400 games, increasing the availability of slot machines and securing a certain level of profit. It becomes easy to do.

  The lower limit when 1600 games are played is set so that, by design, the re-gamer will be elected at least 219 times (219 ≦ P2). It is set to exceed 2/5 (2/5 <Q2). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, as a result of playing 1600 times, there is a risk that the player will be in a significantly disadvantageous state, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. In addition, when the number of games that have exceeded 400 but less than 1600 has been played and the payout rate does not exceed 2/5, the player has played up to 1600 Since it will also be conscious of trying to recover even a little (to increase profits), the game venue will have more opportunities for players to play up to 1600 times, the slot machine operating rate will increase and remain constant It becomes easy to secure the profit.

  The upper limit when 1600 games are played is set so that the re-gamer wins in a range not exceeding 1200 times (P2 ≦ 1200) by design. The rate is set to be less than 1.5 (Q2 <1.5). If the upper limit value of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a possibility that the game hall may be significantly disadvantaged as a result of playing 1600 times. However, according to this example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. In addition, if the game play rate is much lower than 1.5 when the number of games exceeds 400 but is less than 1600, the player can play up to 1600 times. As a game hall, the chances for players to play games up to 1600 times will increase, and the utilization rate of slot machines will increase. It becomes easy to secure a certain profit.

  Regarding the lower limit when 6000 games are played, the re-playing role is set to be elected at least 821 times (821 ≦ P3) by design. It is set to exceed 1/2 (1/2 <Q3). If the lower limit value of the payout rate is set lower than this, there is a possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state as a result of playing 6000 times. According to this example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. In addition, when the number of games that have exceeded 1600, but less than 6000, and the payout rate does not exceed 1/2, as a player, Since it will also be conscious of trying to recover even a little (increased profits), the game venue will have more opportunities for players to play games up to 6000 times, and the operating rate of slot machines will increase and remain constant It will be easier to secure profits.

  The upper limit when 6000 games are played is set so that the re-game player is elected in a range not exceeding 4500 times (P2 ≦ 4500) by design. The rate is set to be lower than 1.26 (Q2 <1.26). If the upper limit value of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a possibility that the game hall may be significantly disadvantaged as a result of playing 6000 times. According to this example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. In addition, when the game has been played more than 1600 times but less than 6000 times, and the payout rate is significantly below 1.26, the player can play up to 6000 times. As a result, the game venue will have more opportunities for players to play games up to 6000 times, increasing the availability of slot machines. It becomes easy to secure a certain profit.

  As for the lower limit when 17500 games are played, the re-playing role is set to be elected at least 2397 times (2397 ≦ P4) by design. It is set to exceed 3/5 (3/5 <Q4). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, as a result of 17500 games, there is a risk that the player will be in a significantly disadvantageous state, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. In addition, when the game has been played more than 6000 times but less than 17500 times and the payout rate has not exceeded 3/5, the player can play up to 17500 times. Since it will also be conscious of trying to recover (to increase profits) as much as possible, the game venue will have more opportunities for players to play up to 17,500 times, and the operating rate of slot machines will increase and remain constant It will be easier to secure profits.

  The upper limit when 17500 games are played is set so that the re-gamer wins in a range not exceeding 13125 (P2 ≦ 13125) by design. The rate is set to be lower than 1.15 (Q2 <1.15). If the upper limit value of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a risk that the gaming place will be significantly disadvantaged as a result of 17500 games, but according to this example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. In addition, if the game play rate is much lower than 1.15 when the number of games exceeds 6000 but less than 17500, the player will play up to 17500. Because it will also be conscious of trying to recover even a little (increased profits), the game venue will have more opportunities for players to play up to 17500 times, increasing the availability of slot machines It becomes easy to secure a certain profit.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 69, the simulation result of the payout rate will be described. FIG. 69 (A) shows an example of the result when the simulation by the above-described second method (the winning combination is always established in the game) is performed over 10 games. ) Shows the winning combination in this simulation (here, the bell combination and the replaying combination), the winning probabilities and the number of payouts (when the number of bets is 3).

  In this simulation result, the winning combinations from the first game to the tenth game are lost, bell, replay, lost, lost, bell, replay, bell, lost, and lost, respectively. Yes. The number of bets is “0” for the next game when the re-game is established, and “3” for other games. The number of payouts is “6” when the bell combination is established, and “0” when the re-game combination is established and lost, so the total bet number in 10 games is “24”, and the total number of payouts Becomes “18”. When the payout rate is calculated based on the simulation result, 0.75 (= 18 ÷ 24) is obtained. This is a result of satisfying the design setting of the above-described payout rates Q1 to Q4. In this simulation result, the bonus combination is not won, but in the case of providing a bonus game to be performed when the bonus combination is won and established, two net increase (for example, 3 bets, 5 payouts) It is preferable to use the bonus game.

  In the above, the upper limit value (300, 1200, 4500, 13125) of the number of winnings of the re-game player in the design when the game is performed a predetermined number of times (400 times, 1600 times, 6000 times, 17500 times). By setting, the upper limit value (2.2, 1.5, 1.26, 1.15) of the payout rate is not exceeded by design. On the other hand, by setting a small number of game medals to be paid out when a small combination is established, even if the number of re-game winnings exceeds the above upper limit, the payout rate is designed as described above. It is also possible to configure so as not to exceed the upper limit value.

<Bonus game settings>
When bonus games are installed, the payout rate is set higher than usual during bonus games, so how to set the upper limit of game media paid out during bonus games greatly increases the overall payout rate. Affect. Further, the bonus game is executed when the ratio of the number of combinations of symbols (also referred to as “bonus symbols”) that triggers the bonus game to the number of combinations of all symbols in all the cylinders increases. Since the ratio also increases, how to set the maximum number of bonus symbol combinations (also referred to as “maximum symbol combination number”) also affects the overall payout rate.

  In the slot machine of the seventh embodiment, a total of three bonus games, two BB (big bonus) games (BB1, BB2) and one MB (middle bonus) game (MB1) are mounted. The BB game is a bonus game ("RB (Regular Bonus) game") that allows a maximum of 8 winnings and a maximum of 15 payouts per winning due to the standard for designing slot machines. Is also a bonus game that can be executed continuously. The MB game is a bonus game in which at least one reel is stopped within a shorter time than usual (for example, 75 milliseconds) after the stop operation is accepted (also referred to as “CB (challenge bonus) game”). This is a bonus game that can be executed continuously.

  Hereinafter, the setting contents of each bonus game will be described individually with reference to FIGS. FIG. 70A shows the setting contents of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and FIG. 70B shows the setting of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. The contents are shown. As shown in the figure, BB1 has an upper limit of the maximum number of payouts in BB1, regardless of whether the number of symbols on each reel is 21 or 20 (up to 225 games in BB1). Medals can be paid out, but no more than 225 will be paid out). BB1 is set to "12" when the maximum number of symbol combinations of BB symbols is 21 on each reel, and is "10" when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. Is set to

  When the actual number of symbol combinations of the BB symbols is set to the maximum number of symbol combinations, the pattern number combination pattern in each reel of BB1 is as illustrated. That is, when the number of symbol combinations of the BB symbol is “12”, there are 18 combinations from the symbol number combination A1 to the symbol number combination A18. When the symbol combination number of the BB symbol is “10” There are nine combination patterns from symbol number combination B1 to symbol number combination B9. Each symbol number combination indicates the number of symbols on the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, the symbol number combination A1 indicates a pattern in which 12 BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. The combination A7 indicates a pattern in which one BB symbol is arranged on the left reel, six BB symbols are arranged on the middle reel, and two BB symbols are arranged on the right reel. Three BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, four BB symbols are arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. Multiply the number of symbols to get “12”).

  Similarly, the symbol number combination B1 indicates a pattern in which 10 BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, 1 BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and 1 BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. The number combination B5 indicates a pattern in which five BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and two BB symbols are arranged on the right reel. , One BB symbol arranged on the left reel, two BB symbols arranged on the middle reel, and five BB symbols arranged on the right reel (all are shown on each reel) Multiply the number of BB symbols to get “10”).

  FIG. 71A shows the setting contents of BB2 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and FIG. 71B shows the setting of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. The contents are shown. As shown in the figure, the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is over “285” (the number of payouts of game medals in BB2 is 285, regardless of whether the number of symbols on each reel is 21 or 20). If it exceeds the number of sheets, BB2 ends). BB2 is set to “6” when the maximum number of symbol combinations of BB symbols is 21 on each reel, and to “5” when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. Is set to

  When the actual number of symbol combinations of BB symbols is set to the maximum number of symbol combinations, the pattern number combination pattern in each reel of BB2 is as shown. That is, when the number of symbol combinations of the BB symbol is “6”, there are nine combination patterns from the symbol number combination C1 to the symbol number combination C9. When the symbol combination number of the BB symbol is “5” There are three kinds of combination patterns from symbol number combination D1 to symbol number combination D3. For example, the symbol number combination C1 indicates a pattern in which six BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. The combination C4 indicates a pattern in which three BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, two BB symbols are arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. Two BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and three BB symbols are arranged on the right reel. Multiply the number of symbols to get “6”).

  Similarly, the symbol number combination D1 indicates a pattern in which five BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. The number combination D2 indicates a pattern in which one BB symbol is arranged on the left reel, five BB symbols are arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. , One BB symbol arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol arranged on the middle reel, and five BB symbols arranged on the right reel. Multiply the number of BB symbols to get “5”).

  FIG. 71 (C) shows the setting contents of MB1 (upper limit on the number of payouts). As shown in the figure, in MB1, the upper limit of the number of payouts in MB1 is set to “over 153” (MB1 ends when the number of payouts of game medals in MB1 exceeds 153). In MB1, the number of symbols on each reel and the maximum number of symbol combinations of bonus symbols are not set.

  In the slot machine of the seventh embodiment, the bonus game has a high advantage for the player in the order of BB2> BB1> MB1. In other words, BB1 and MB1 are bonus games that are less advantageous than BB2, but are positioned as advantageous bonus games over a single RB game. In one RB game, according to the standard when designing a slot machine, it is possible to pay up to 120 (up to 8 wins and up to 15 payout per win). Become. Therefore, if the upper limit of the number of payouts of BB1 or MB1 is set to “120” or less, a player who can receive only that amount of payout may have the impression of a bonus game below the RB game. Therefore, in order to ensure that the player knows that the bonus game is more advantageous than the RB game (the number of payouts is larger than the maximum payout number “120” allowed in the standard of one RB game), BB1 The upper limit of the number of payouts in MB1 is set to “maximum 225” in BB1, and “over 153” in MB1.

  BB2 is a bonus game with a higher advantage than BB1 or MB1. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is set to exceed the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB1 and MB1. However, if the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is set too high, there is a possibility that a player who has won many game medals by BB2 will be more likely to be immersed in the game in order to win BB2. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is set to “over 285” for the purpose of preventing such a game from being absorbed (inhibition of euphoria). The numerical value “285” is larger than twice the maximum payout number “120” allowed in the standard of one RB game and smaller than three times.

<Other embodiments>
Next, another embodiment different from the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 is an external view showing the external appearance of a slot machine according to another embodiment. In the following description, “image” includes a still image and a moving image unless otherwise limited.

  Conventionally, game machines have been alerted during game standby as a countermeasure for falling over (a measure for reducing the number of players who play beyond their own resources). However, the majority of the players who are watching the demo screen are not the players who are currently engaged, but are the players who are about to start playing. There was no decrease in the number of players who played beyond their own resources.

The sinking is considered to result from the player being unable to make a calm judgment. The following timing is given as a timing at which there is a high possibility that a calm judgment cannot be made.
(1) Timing of AT Game Ending During an AT game, since many game medals are awarded, it can be said that there is a high possibility that the player's willingness will increase and a calm judgment cannot be made. Moreover, it is easy to have an expectation that the AT game is hidden (whether it is won in the AT lottery) or not, and it is highly possible that a calm judgment cannot be made. Further, at the end of the AT game, the total number of game medals awarded during the AT game is displayed on the image display device. At that time, if the number of game medals awarded during AT game is less than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount used so far, it will be easy to fall back (let's win the AT lottery) and be calm Is likely to be unable to judge.
(2) Timing when the bonus game ends During the bonus game, a lot of game medals are awarded, so it is highly likely that the player's willingness will be increased and a calm judgment cannot be made. Further, if the number of winning bonus combinations is large, it is easy to have an expectation that the setting is high (for example, the setting value is 5 or more), and there is a high possibility that a calm determination cannot be made. Further, at the end of the bonus game, the total number of game medals awarded during the bonus game is displayed on the image display device. At that time, if the number of game medals awarded during the bonus game is less than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount used so far, it will be easy to fall back (let's win the bonus role) and be calm Is likely to be unable to judge.

  Therefore, in another embodiment, attention is given at the timing when a special game such as an AT game or a bonus game where many game medals can be awarded ends.

  FIG. 73 is an example of an end screen displayed on the image display device and an image for calling attention (hereinafter referred to as “attention calling image”) at the end of the special game. The end screen is an image showing at least the total number (TOTAL XXX) of game medals awarded during the special game and the background. Note that an image indicating the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX) awarded during the special game may be prepared as a separate image from the image indicating the background (hereinafter referred to as “background image”). In addition, the alert image is an image clearly stating “Let's be careful about the intrusion. Pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately.”

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the size of the alert image displayed on the image display device at the end of the special game will be described. If the attention calling image is too small, the player cannot recognize it and cannot exert the effect expected as a countermeasure for the sinking. On the other hand, if it is too large, it may hinder the viewing of other images. In other words, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in another embodiment, if the image display device that displays the alert image is less than 7 inches (in other words, if it is a small image display device), the alert image has a vertical size of 10.00 mm. The width is 64.12 mm. If the image display device that displays the alert image is 7 inches or more (in other words, if it is a large image display device), the alert image is 30.00 mm in length and 192.37 mm in width. It is said.

  Next, the timing for displaying the end screen and the alert image on the image display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 75A and 75B are final games of special games. When a game medal is awarded in the final game (when a small role wins), an end screen and an alert are displayed on the image display device after adding or paying out credits. An image is displayed (FIG. 75 (a)). If no game medal is awarded in the final game (such as when a replay role is won), the end screen and a warning image are displayed on the image display device after all reels have stopped rotating (FIG. 75 (b)). ).

  Next, the timing at which the end screen on the image display device is not displayed will be described. One reason for displaying the end screen is to teach the player the total number of game medals awarded during the special game. That is, it can be said that there is no problem even if the end screen is not displayed at the timing when it is considered that the player has recognized the total number of game medals given during the special game. Thus, in another embodiment, the end screen is not displayed when the start switch is operated.

  In another embodiment, when the start switch is operated, an effect screen corresponding to the game situation at that time is displayed on the image display device. For example, if the bonus game or the game after the end of the AT game is a normal game, and if you win the cherry role, which is one of the small roles, it means that you have won the cherry role as shown in FIG. A suggestion effect screen can be displayed. In addition, if the game after the bonus game ends is an AT preparation game, and if a win in the push order bell role, which is one of the small roles, is won, the stop switch is operated in any order as shown in FIG. It is possible to display a push order image (hereinafter also referred to as “navigation image”) indicating what should be done and an effect screen during the AT preparation game.

  Next, the time during which the alert image is displayed will be described. If the time for displaying the caution image is too short, the player cannot recognize it, and the effect expected as a countermeasure for entrainment cannot be exhibited. Moreover, even if it can be recognized, it does not care, and the effect expected as a countermeasure for entrainment cannot be exhibited. On the other hand, if it is too long, there is a possibility of hindering the viewing of other images. In other words, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in another embodiment, the warning image is continuously displayed only for a time during which the effect expected as a countermeasure for entrainment can be exhibited and the player does not feel uncomfortable. The appropriate time to continue displaying the alert image will be explained step by step.

  First, with reference to FIG. 77, the time spent when the player plays in the shortest time will be described. After the start switch is operated, the time taken from the start of the reel rotation until the reel rotation speed becomes constant is about 180 ms. In addition, it takes 190 ms at maximum for the reel rotation to stop after the stop switch is operated (Article 6 of the Regulations on the Approval of the Game Machine and the Examination of the Model, etc.) Stipulated in Appendix 5 (1) A (G)). Furthermore, the time spent for adding the game medals to be added as the number of credits and the time spent actually paying out are about 40 ms per piece. In other words, the time spent when a player plays in the shortest time varies depending on the number of game medals to be given, but it is a specification in which a plurality of stop switches cannot be operated simultaneously (a plurality of reels cannot be controlled simultaneously). If the specification is about 750 ms to about 1070 ms (when 0 to 8 game medals are given) and a plurality of stop switches can be operated simultaneously (a plurality of reels can be stopped simultaneously), about 370 ms to about 690 ms It can be said that (when 0 to 8 game medals are given).

  Incidentally, even if the player plays in the shortest time, it is not possible to finish one game in less than the minimum game time (the minimum time required for one game is 4100 ms or more). This is the interpretation of Appendix Table 5 (1) (i) and its technical standards shown in Article 6 (Technical Standards for Game Machine Types) concerning Regulations for Game Machine Approval and Model Examination, etc. It is defined in the standard. Therefore, in another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, even when the previous game is played in the shortest time and the start switch is operated, the reel starts rotating in the previous game. Since 4100 ms has elapsed since the start of the rotation of the game, one game is not finished in less than the minimum game time.

  In general, in a BB game that is one of the bonus games, a small role that does not require pressing (a small character that does not need to operate a stop switch for a specific symbol) is won with high probability (be sure to win) It may be a specification). Moreover, in AT games, although the push order bell role and the push order replay role that require the stop switches to be operated in a specific order are won, they are taught in which order they should be operated. Further, the player is in an excited state during the bonus game or AT game. Therefore, at least during a special game, many players play in the shortest time.

  As described above, even if the player plays in the shortest time, one game cannot be completed in less than the minimum game time. That is, as shown in FIG. 79, when the last game of the special game is played in the shortest time, even if the start switch is operated immediately, there is a certain amount of time until the reel starts to rotate. Further, there is a certain amount of time until the rotation speed of the reel becomes constant even after the rotation of the reel is started. During these times, any operation by the player is invalid, so even if the alert image continues to be displayed, the player will not be discomforted. If the display continues, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. This is because, when these times are exceeded, at least the operation of the stop switch is effective, but the stop switch is caused by the overlap of the suggestion that the player has won the cherry role as shown in FIG. This is because you cannot operate the switch (because you do not know which role you should aim for), and because the alert image is displayed, you may feel uneasy about not operating the stop switch. . Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable that the time during which the alert image is displayed does not exceed these times.

  Therefore, in another embodiment, an appropriate time for continuously displaying the alert image is set to 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. The reason why it is set to 3000 ms or longer is that the longer it is, the more likely it is to exhibit the effect expected as a countermeasure against entrainment.

  As shown in FIG. 80, it seems that there are a few players who play a game over time even during a special game. In that case, if the warning image is continuously displayed for 3210 ms, at least the operation of the stop switch becomes effective in the middle, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. However, since it is a player who plays a game during a special game, there is a high possibility that the player will not feel uncomfortable than a player who plays a game in the shortest time. Incidentally, if a game is played in the shortest time after the alert image is not displayed, one game can be finished before the minimum game time elapses. Therefore, although one game can be ended before the minimum game time has elapsed, the alert image has been continuously displayed, so that one time before the minimum game time has elapsed. There will be no complaints that the game could not be ended (lost).

  Next, the position where the alert image is displayed will be described. Basically, it is preferably displayed at a position where the player can easily recognize. One of the positions that the player can easily recognize is a position above the center of the housing. This is because the eyes of the player are above the center of the chassis.

  In another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the image display device is provided above the center of the housing, and as shown in FIG. 73, a warning image is displayed above the center of the image display device.

  Of course, if the image display device is provided above the center of the housing, it is above the center of the image display device, above the center, the upper right corner, above the center, above the left corner, below the center, below the center, below the center, and below the right corner. A warning image may be displayed in the lower left corner below the center.

  In addition, it is preferable to determine the position for displaying the alert image in consideration of the position where another image is displayed. For example, it is preferable to display a caution image at a position that does not overlap as much as possible with the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX) given during the special game or the suggestion of winning the cherry role. Moreover, it is preferable to display a caution image at a position that does not overlap as much as possible with the push order image.

  Furthermore, in another embodiment, alerting is performed even during game standby. FIG. 81 shows a demo screen displayed on the image display device during game standby.

  When the game is on standby, an image showing the manufacturer is first displayed (FIG. 81 (a)). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, a warning image is displayed (FIG. 81 (b)). Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed, an image introducing the subject of the slot machine is displayed (FIG. 81 (c)). As described above, during the game standby, FIG. 81 (a) to FIG. 81 (c) are repeatedly displayed on the image display device.

  As described above, the majority of the players who are watching the demo screen are not the players who are currently engaged, but the players who are about to start the game. As a countermeasure against enthusiasm, there may be a method of impressing a player who wants to start a game that he / she should not be preliminarily involved. However, excessive alerting may reduce the willingness to play. Therefore, in another embodiment, the time during which an image for alerting during the game standby is continuously displayed is shorter than the time during which the image for alerting at the end of the special game is displayed. In other words, it is less than 3000 ms. Specifically, it is 2000 ms or less. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  By the way, the position and size for displaying the alert image are the same as the position and size when displayed at the end of the special game. This is because if the display position is changed depending on the situation, the burden on the sub-control unit may increase. Also, if the size is changed, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of images.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, a case where an error occurs in the final game of the special game will be described. In another embodiment, even if an error occurs between when the start switch is operated and when the rotation of all the reels is stopped, the progress of the game is not stopped until the rotation of all the reels is stopped. It has become. This is because if the progress of the game is stopped, the player's concentration is lost, and mistakes are likely to occur when operating the stop switch. Note that the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped.

  When all the reels stop rotating (when the progress of the game stops), an error image is displayed on the image display device. This is because if an error image is displayed when an error occurs, the player may miss a surprising time signature. After that, when the error is cleared, the progress of the game is resumed (if a game medal is given, the game medal to be given is added as the number of credits or actually paid out), and an end screen and a caution are displayed on the image display device. An arousal image is displayed.

  Although a certain amount of time is spent until the error is released, the warning image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). Of course, the warning image will continue to be displayed after the stop switch is activated, which may cause discomfort to the player, but if you keep the warning image displayed for a short time, This is because there is a slight possibility that the effect expected as a countermeasure for entrainment cannot be exhibited. Also, since it will take some time before the error is cleared, there is a possibility that you do not think that there is discomfort just by displaying the alert image even after the stop switch operation becomes effective Is high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a description will be given of a case where an error has occurred in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game. In another embodiment, when an error occurs before the start switch is operated, the progress of the game is stopped when the error occurs. Note that the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped.

  Further, when the progress of the game is stopped, the image display device displays an error image superimposed on the alert image. Incidentally, since it is necessary to promptly inform the game store clerk that an error has occurred, the error image has a higher priority than the alert image. After that, when the error is released, the progress of the game is resumed (if a game medal is given, the game medal to be given is added as the number of credits or actually paid out), and the image display device displays the error image. Display.

  A certain amount of time will be spent until the error is cleared, but it does not include the time for which the error image is displayed (time spent until the error is cleared), and a predetermined time (3000 ms or more) , 3210 ms or less) continues to display the alert image. The time that has been displayed before the error image is displayed (error occurs) is included. Of course, the warning image will continue to be displayed after the stop switch is activated, which may cause discomfort to the player, but if you keep the warning image displayed for a short time, This is because there is a slight possibility that the effect expected as a countermeasure for entrainment cannot be exhibited. Also, since it will take some time before the error is cleared, there is a possibility that you do not think that there is discomfort just by displaying the alert image even after the stop switch operation becomes effective Is high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a case will be described in which the supply of power is stopped in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game. In another embodiment, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is stopped when the supply of power is stopped, and the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is restarted when the supply of power is resumed.

  When the supply of power is stopped, the image display device is also stopped. When the supply of power is restarted, the image display device also restarts display. Note that the alerting image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) including the time that has been displayed before the power supply is stopped. As a result, if a game is played in the shortest time, the alert image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, and the player will not be uncomfortable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a case will be described in which the effect switch is operated in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game. In another embodiment, when a game medal is awarded, the added game medal is added as the number of credits or is actually paid out until the game medal is inserted (the bet switch is operated and inserted through the slot). When the effect switch is operated during this period, a menu screen is displayed on the image display device. When the menu screen is displayed on the image display device, items such as password entry, two-dimensional code display, and payout table can be selected. Specifically, each item can be selected by operating a cross key switch and an effect switch.

  Even if the effect switch is operated, the alerting image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). This is because, if the alert image is not displayed when the menu screen is displayed, there is a possibility that the effect expected as a countermeasure for entrainment cannot be exhibited.

  However, the position where the alert image is displayed is such that the selected item can be recognized. In other words, as long as the selected item can be understood, it may be displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the position for displaying the alert image is a position that does not overlap as much as possible with the two-dimensional code displayed when the two-dimensional code display is selected. This is to prevent the player who wants to finish the game from ending the game immediately after the alert image continues to be displayed.

  In another embodiment, at the end of the special game, a warning image is displayed on the image display device together with the end screen. However, if the number of game medals given during the special game is extremely small, At the end, the alert image may not be displayed on the image display device.

  This means that if there are extremely few game medals given during a special game, the player will not be bothered, and will be given during a special game rather than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount used so far. This is because even if there are a small number of game medals, it is difficult to fall back (because it is almost impossible to get back).

  As an example of the case where the game medals given during the special game are extremely small, there are a case where the number is less than 300 when the AT game is being played, and a case where the number is 50 or less when the bonus game is being played. In addition, an alert screen is displayed on the image display device at the end of the special game or part of the demo screen, but every fixed time (for example, every hour) or every fixed number of games (for example, every 600 games). A predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) may be displayed, or when a certain number of games (600 games) have elapsed since the last time the alert screen was displayed. You may make it display. At this time, the alert screen may be displayed smaller in the upper right corner than the center of the image display device, or may be the same position and size when displayed at the end of the special game. Moreover, when displaying, it may be displayed simultaneously with other effects (such as a continuous effect, a notice effect or an effect indicating expectation), or the display period is set to be an inoperable period. Also good. By displaying periodically, it is possible to alert a player who is not executing a special game.

  In another embodiment, at the end of the special game, the alert image is displayed on the image display device together with the end screen. However, when the end screen is not displayed, the alert image may not be displayed. . For example, when an AT game is played 20 times continuously, a moving image is displayed on the image display device during the 20th AT game. Even if the bonus combination is won during the 20th AT game, even during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, the image display device wants to continue displaying the moving image. Therefore, at the end of the bonus game, the image display device The end screen is not displayed. In such a case, it may be a hindrance when visually recognizing the displayed moving image, so that a warning image may not be displayed. However, at the end of the 20th AT game, it is preferable to display an end screen and an alert image on the image display device.

  In other embodiments, the size of the alert image is the size shown in FIG. 74, but it may be any size as long as the effect expected as a countermeasure for entrainment can be exhibited, and is larger than the size shown in FIG. 74. It may be an image.

  Moreover, you may make it change the magnitude | size of the alert image displayed at the time of completion | finish of a special game according to a condition. For example, the size when displaying with the end screen and the size when displaying with the effect screen may be different.

  In another embodiment, when a game medal is awarded, an end screen and a warning image are displayed on the image display device after addition or payout as the number of credits, but the image is displayed after all reels have stopped rotating. You may make it display on a display apparatus, and you may make it display on an image display apparatus, when the last stop switch is released. In addition, when no game medal is given, the end screen and the warning image are displayed on the image display device after the rotation of all reels is stopped, but when the last stop switch is released, the image display device You may make it display.

  In another embodiment, the end screen and the alert image are displayed on the image display device at the same timing, but the alert image may be displayed after the end screen is displayed. Furthermore, a warning image may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end screen was displayed.

  In other embodiments, the end screen is hidden when the start switch is operated regardless of whether or not a game medal is given in the final game, but a game medal is given in the final game. When the game medal is inserted (the bet switch is operated and inserted through the insertion slot), the end screen may be hidden.

  Moreover, it is good also as non-display when predetermined time passes after displaying an end screen. This is because not only the end screen but also a warning image is displayed on the image display device, so that a player who feels anxiety may not operate the start switch.

  In another embodiment, the image display device is provided above the center of the housing, but the image display device may be provided at the center of the housing. In that case, if the alert image is displayed above the center of the image display device, the upper right corner from the center, the upper left corner from the center, and the center, the image is displayed at a position close to the height of the player's eyes. If there is only one image display device, the player's line of sight gathers there, so a warning image is displayed in the lower right corner from the center, the lower right corner from the center, and the lower left corner from the center. Also good.

  Further, the image display device may be provided below the center of the housing due to the influence of the design of the housing. If only one image display device is provided, the player's line of sight gathers there, so the upper side from the center, the upper right corner from the center, the upper left corner from the center, the center, the lower side from the center, and the lower side from the center. An alert image may be displayed in the right corner on the side and in the left corner below the center.

  Further, the position of the alert image displayed at the end of the special game may be changed depending on the situation. For example, the position when displaying together with the end screen may be different from the position when displaying together with the effect screen.

  In other embodiments, FIG. 81 (a) to FIG. 81 (c) are repeatedly displayed during game standby, but the display order may be switched. For example, FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 82 (c) may be repeatedly displayed. The reason why the player views the demo screen before starting the game is to confirm what the subject of the slot machine to start the game is. If there is a possibility that the willingness to play will be significantly reduced by displaying an image for alerting before the image introducing the subject of the slot machine is displayed as in other embodiments, display It is preferable to change the order of performing. Note that the order of replacement is not limited to this.

  In another embodiment, the time to continue displaying the alert image while waiting for the game is set to less than 3000 ms. However, if it is necessary to impress the player who is about to start the game, it is 3000 ms if it is necessary to impress in advance. You may make it continue displaying above.

  In other embodiments, the position and size of the alert image displayed during the game standby are the same as the position and size when displayed at the end of the special game. May be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 83, when a warning image is always displayed during game standby, it may be displayed smaller in the upper right corner than the center of the image display device. This is a contrivance to prevent excessive alerting even if the alerting image continues to be displayed for a long time. Note that the display position and size are not limited to this.

  In another embodiment, even if an error occurs between when the start switch is operated and when the rotation of all the reels is stopped, the progress of the game is not stopped until the rotation of all the reels is stopped. However, the progress of the game may not be stopped until the game medals to be given are added as the number of credits or actually paid out (except when the game medals are not given).

  In another embodiment, if an error occurs between the start switch being operated and the rotation of all reels being stopped, an error image is displayed on the image display device when the progress of the game is stopped. However, an error image may be displayed when an error occurs. As a result, the game clerk can rush and the error can be canceled immediately after the progress of the game is stopped.

  In another embodiment, if an error occurs between the start switch being operated and the rotation of all reels being stopped, the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured while the game is stopped. Although it is performed, the measurement of the minimum game time may be stopped. As a result, if a game is played in the shortest time, the alert image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, and the player will not be uncomfortable.

  In another embodiment, if an error occurs between the start switch being operated and the rotation of all reels being stopped, a predetermined time (3000 ms) is used regardless of the time spent until the error is cleared. As described above, the warning image is continuously displayed for 3210 ms or less. However, the time for which the warning image is continuously displayed may be shortened by the time spent until the error is canceled or the time corresponding to the time. For example, when 60000 ms or more is spent before the error is released, the alert image may be continuously displayed for 1000 ms.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs in the situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game, the error image is displayed over the alert image, but the alert image is not displayed. And an error image may be displayed. And when an error is cancelled | released, an error image may be hidden and an alerting image may be displayed. This is suitable when the priority of the error image and the alert image is desired to be the same.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game, the time during which the error image is displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared) Not included, the warning image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more, 3210 ms or less), but the error image is continuously displayed (time spent until the error is cleared). Including the warning image may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). Regardless of whether or not an error image is displayed (whether or not an error has occurred), it is only necessary to display the alert image for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). There is no need to increase the burden.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game, the time that has been displayed before the error image is displayed (error occurs) is included. However, the time that has been displayed before the error image is displayed (error occurs) may not be included. This is suitable when an error image is displayed and the player's consciousness is likely to deviate from the alert image.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game, the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the game is stopped. However, the measurement of the minimum game time may be stopped. As a result, if a game is played in the shortest time, the alert image will not continue to be displayed even after the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, and the player will not be uncomfortable.

  In other embodiments, if an error occurs in the situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game, the priority of the error image is set higher than the alert image, but the priority of the alert image May be set higher than the error image. However, since it is not preferable that the type of error that has occurred cannot be specified by the alert image, it is preferable that the position where the alert image is displayed does not overlap with the location where the type of error that has occurred is specified. . In addition, as long as the types of errors that have occurred can be specified, they may overlap.

  In this case, the alert image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) including the time during which the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is canceled). You may do it.

  In another embodiment, when the power supply is stopped in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of the special game, the time that has been displayed before the power supply is stopped is included. However, the time that has been displayed before the power supply is stopped may not be included. This is suitable when the player's consciousness is likely to deviate from the alert image due to the stop of the power supply.

  In another embodiment, an image display device that starts (resumes display) immediately after power supply is resumed is used. However, even when an image display device that takes time to start is used, power supply is stopped. The warning image may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) including the time that has been displayed before the display. Depending on the time it takes to start up, the warning image will continue to be displayed even after the stop switch operation is enabled, which may cause discomfort to the player. This is because there is a slight possibility that the effect expected as a countermeasure for entrainment cannot be achieved if the duration of the operation is shortened. However, if there is a possibility of giving the player great discomfort, the time for which the alert image is continuously displayed may be shortened by the time until starting or the time corresponding to the time. The time that has been displayed before the supply of power is stopped may not be included.

  In another embodiment, when a game medal is awarded, the added game medal is added as the number of credits or is actually paid out until the game medal is inserted (the bet switch is operated and inserted through the slot). In the meantime, when the effect switch is operated, the menu screen is displayed on the image display device, but regardless of whether or not a game medal is awarded, until the start switch is operated, When the effect switch is operated, a menu screen may be displayed on the image display device.

  In another embodiment, the position for displaying the alert image is such that the selected item can be recognized when the menu screen is displayed, but the position where the selected item is not known is selected. May be. By doing in this way, it can suppress that a player's consciousness deviates from a caution image.

  In other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, even if the alert image continues to be displayed, the operation of the start switch or the like is effective (the game proceeds), but the alert image is While it is continuously displayed, it may be frozen. In other words, the operation of the start switch or the like may be invalidated (the progress of the game is stopped). Although the player will be uncomfortable, the effects expected as a countermeasure for entrainment can be maximized. Specifically, since the progress of the game is stopped for a long time, the willingness to play can be reduced to some extent. In this case, it is appropriate that the time during which the alert image is displayed is a time during which the game motivation can be reduced to some extent. However, if it is too long (for example, the time is longer than the minimum game time), there is a possibility that the player will never play again. Therefore, it is preferably 3000 ms or more and less than 4100 ms.

  In the case of freezing, as shown in FIG. 84, after the end screen is displayed on the image display device, the end screen may be hidden and only the alert image may be displayed. By displaying only the caution image, the player's consciousness can be surely directed to the caution image, so that the effect expected as a countermeasure against entrainment can be further exhibited. In addition, after a predetermined time (predetermined time of 3000 ms or more and less than 4100) has elapsed since the display of the alert image, the alert image is not displayed and the end screen is displayed again. Okay, you may continue to display only the alert image.

  First, during the game standby, the screens are displayed in the order of FIG. 81 (b), FIG. 81 (a), and FIG. 81 (c), and at the timing for displaying FIG. 84 (b), FIG. You may make it continue displaying (b). This eliminates the need to prepare an image for displaying FIG.

  In other embodiments, the alert is performed on the image display device, but the alert may be performed on devices other than the image display device. For example, a warning image may be displayed on the panel portion of the housing at a position that is easily recognized by the player.

  The alert image is not limited to the one illustrated. For example, “Pachinko / pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately. Be careful of being swallowed.” Or “Be careful of swallowing.

  Note that the color and font of characters are free as long as they are not easily recognized by the player. For example, if the color is similar to the background image at the time of displaying the alert image, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the color. Therefore, it is preferable that the color is different from the color that occupies most of the background image. In particular, it is preferable that the color is opposite to the color in the hue circle (hereinafter also referred to as “opposite color”) or a color close to the opposite color because the color is more attractive.

  In another embodiment, the time appropriate for continuing to display the alert image is calculated by taking, for example, the case where the maximum number of game medals is given during the special game as eight, but it is given during the special game. Even when the number of game medals is 8 or more and 15 or less, it is preferable that an appropriate time for continuously displaying the alert image is 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. Certainly, when 15 game medals are awarded, the time spent is about 280 ms longer than when 8 game medals are awarded, so it is appropriate to continue displaying the alert image accordingly. If the time is shortened, the alert image can be hidden before the stop switch operation becomes effective. However, even if the alert image is not displayed about 280 ms after the stop switch operation becomes effective, it is very unlikely that the player will notice it. If so, the longer it can be, the more effective it can be as a countermeasure against entrainment. Therefore, it is preferable that the appropriate time for continuously displaying the alert image is 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less.

  In addition, when the clearing process is performed after the alerting screen display, the alerting screen may be terminated even when the clearing process is finished for less than 3 seconds from the start of the alerting screen display. In that case, display of the demo screen is started after the settlement process is completed. This is because the player finishes the game by the clearing process, and the alert screen is displayed on the demo screen, so there is no need to display the prevention of intrusion. Also, by closing the alert screen, it becomes clearer that the previous player is not playing, and the next player can quickly play the game without being confused by whether the previous player is playing. Will be able to do.

  In addition, it is possible to combine suitably embodiment mentioned above, a change aspect, and other embodiment, Furthermore, it is also possible to combine suitably the modification mentioned above with respect to each embodiment or those combinations. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines other than slot machines (for example, pachinko machines, casino machines, arrangement balls, game medals and enclosed game machines that do not use game balls).

  As an example of the enclosed game machine, there is a game machine capable of playing using an electronic game medium instead of a physical game medium such as a game medal or a game ball. In such a game machine, the number of electronic game media can be displayed on a 7-segment display having a plurality of digits (two or more digits). The electronic game media may be directly inserted into the gaming machine by the player, or indirectly through a device provided outside the gaming machine according to the player's instruction. Also good. In the enclosed game machine, when a small combination is established, an electronic game medium is given to the player (the number of electronic game media displayed on the multi-digit 7-segment display increases).

  In addition, in the enclosed game machine, AT lottery or bonus lottery (a combination lottery for determining one or more combinations from a plurality of combinations including a bonus combination) is performed. Then, when winning the AT lottery or winning the bonus lottery, an effect (also referred to as an illusory effect) is given for that. Incidentally, even when the AT lottery is not won or when the bonus lottery is not won, an effect for scolding is performed. As an example of the production, a series of productions performed over a plurality of games, and the final announcement (continuous production) of whether or not the AT lottery is won and whether or not the bonus lottery is won. And an effect that displays a background image on the image display device that is easy to stay when winning the AT lottery or winning the bonus lottery (sometimes referred to as a precursor effect). Can be mentioned.

  As a countermeasure against entrapment, game prohibition means may be provided to prevent a player from playing (injecting) using an amount exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 50,000 yen) per day. Specifically, it is possible to make an input until a predetermined amount is reached, and it is impossible to make an input exceeding the predetermined amount. In this case, the enclosed game machine may be provided, or in the case of an enclosed game machine that can be indirectly inserted, a device provided outside the gaming machine corresponding to the enclosed game machine is provided. May be.

  The remaining number of electronic gaming media can be managed by a device provided outside the gaming machine (specifically, when the game is finished, the electronic number displayed on the multi-digit 7-segment display is displayed. The game media may be stored (stored) in a device provided outside the game machine), and may be inserted from the remaining number of electronic game media stored. In this case, the game prohibition means prevents the player from playing (injecting) using an amount exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 50,000 yen) per day separately from the insertion from the stored ball. Alternatively, the total number of electronic gaming media to be thrown from the storage and the number of electronic gaming media to be thrown in using the amount exceeds the number converted from the predetermined amount to electronic gaming media. May not be allowed to enter.

  Even if either the enclosed game machine or the device provided outside the game machine has a game prohibition means, the enclosed game machine has won the AT lottery or the bonus lottery. If the amount of money used by a player exceeds a predetermined amount before the AT game or bonus game related to the notification is over, the game may not be disabled. Good. This is because it is too cruel if a player cannot play a game despite being notified. This is because the amount of money to be newly used is known to be high (about 1000 to 2000 yen). By the way, when AT game or bonus game is over, you may not be able to play the game (because it was originally not possible to play), and it is displayed on a 7-digit display with multiple digits You may be able to play while the electronic game media remain (this is an electronic game media given during AT games and bonus games, and does not use a new amount) For).

  In addition, when either the enclosed game machine or the device provided outside the game machine has a game prohibition means, and when winning the AT lottery or winning the bonus lottery, one game is played. The number of electronic game media (for example, 3) necessary for the game, the remaining number of electronic game media (for example, the remaining 12) displayed on the multi-digit 7-segment display, and the player's actual use. Such as the difference between the amount of money and the predetermined amount (for example, it has already reached 50,000 yen) (in this case, the situation is described based on three types of information, but this is not a limitation, It may be determined by any two pieces of information, and one or more pieces of new information such as information on the remaining number of electronic gaming media (so-called storage balls) managed by a device provided outside the gaming machine are included in the three pieces of information. In addition, AT lottery and Bona To determine the timing of until the announcement that they are winning the lottery (something announcement to after the game) is desirable. This is to prevent the player from becoming unable to play before announcing that he has won. If the enclosed game machine has a game prohibition means, the necessary information (such as the difference between the amount currently used by the player and the predetermined amount) can be obtained from the device provided outside the gaming machine. Information and information on the remaining number of usable electronic gaming media managed by a device provided outside the gaming machine are received and judged.

  In addition, in the case where either the enclosed game machine or the device provided outside the game machine is provided with a game prohibition means, a situation in which a game cannot be played soon (the electronic necessary for playing one game) The number of game media is 3, the remaining number of electronic game media displayed on the multi-digit 7-segment display is 3, and the amount currently used by the player has reached a predetermined amount) As an effect of the next game, it is desirable not to perform a roaring effect regardless of whether or not the AT lottery or bonus lottery is won. This is because if the game cannot be played as soon as the roaring effect is performed, the interest of the game is lowered, and there is a possibility that the game will be separated.

  Further, before the situation where the game cannot be played soon, a display may be made to advise that there is a possibility that even if the game is continued as it is, the profit cannot be obtained even if the profit can be obtained. The display timing may be a state in which an amount of game media that can be used to digest the required number of games is received from the opportunity of AT lottery or bonus lottery, and the benefit based on the lottery result is left, for example, a player May be the timing when the amount of money specified reaches a specific amount (for example, 45,000 yen) lower than the predetermined amount. By this advice, it is possible to prevent a user from using the predetermined amount and not being able to enjoy the profit even though the profit (AT game, bonus game) can be acquired.

1 slot machine 3a, 3b, 3c reel 25 start lever 26a, 26b, 26c stop switch 60, 600 main control board 70 sub control board 70A sub main control board 70B sub sub control board 100 main control means 200 sub control means 200A sub main control Means 200B Sub-sub control means

Claims (1)

Multiple reels with multiple types of symbols,
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When an event occurs in which the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted, and then the power supply is detected, it is configured to execute the power-off process.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination in a game for which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, based on the fact that the player's stop operation has been accepted,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means in the predetermined game state, each predetermined reel is stopped by receiving a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation. The game corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped after the symbols corresponding to the combination are stopped, and after the stop operation is accepted at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped. Configured to give value to the player ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Although the stop operation is received at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol is generated in a situation where a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation occurs and all the reels are stopped thereafter. Even after the combination is not stopped, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided to the player ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game In the situation where the stop operation is accepted at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation and the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted thereafter, the predetermined symbol combination is supported until the power supply is detected. A gaming machine characterized in that the symbol to be stopped is configured to stop.